Home

1 Select

1. 7 The USB Cable Clip To prevent cable from being disconnected fasten the clip as shown 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 5 Turnthe camera on Power switch If Mass Storage is selected for USB pg 257 P E will be displayed in the control panels and viewfinder and the PC connection indicator will flash in the top control panel camera displays do not change if MTP PTP is selected 6 Transfer photographs Transfer photographs to the computer as described in the online help for Nikon Transfer To view the online help start Nikon Transfer and select Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu m During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress 259 260 7 Turn the camera off If MTP PTP is selected for USB the camera can be turned off and the USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete If Mass Storage is selected the camera must first be removed from the system as described below Windows Vista Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon _ in the taskbar and select Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon E in the taskbar a
2. To Description View Press to view photographs in order additional recorded lt to view photographs in photographs reverse order View photo Press A or W to view information information about current photograph pg 229 View See page 241 for more information on thumbnails the thumbnail display J Zoom in on E See page 243 for more information on photograph l playback zoom pe Confirmation dialog will be displayed Delete images U Press fi again to delete photo pg 245 If voice memo has not been recorded Record pla voice memo will be recorded while amp i pay v button is pressed If voice memo has voice memo been recorded pressing amp button will start playback pg 248 Change To protect image or to remove protect On protection from protected image press status Om button pg 244 B View images If two memory cards are inserted on other choose memory card from which memory card pictures are played back pg 228 Return to shooting mode Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately Display menus See page 277 for more information 227 a 228 Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 287 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s the default setting after shooting because the camera is already in the correct orientation images are not rota
3. Long Time Exposures At a shutter speed of hu i 4 the shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is held down Use for long time exposure photographs of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks Nikon recommends using a fully charged EN EL4a battery or an optional EH 6 AC adapter to prevent loss of Shutter speed 35 s power while the shutter is open Note that Aperture f 25 noise and distortion may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu pg 300 See Also See Custom Setting f10 Reverse indicators pg 345 for information on reversing the electronic analog exposure display Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock The M button can be used to lock shutter speed at the value selected in shutter priority auto or manual exposure mode or to lock aperture at the value selected in aperture priority auto and manual exposure modes Lock is not available in programmed auto HE Shutter Speed Lock To lock shutter speed at the selected value press the I button and rotate the main command dial until Ml icons appear in the viewfinder and the top control panel button Main command dial To unlock shutter speed press the M button and rotate the main command dial until the icons disappear from the displays AF S EUA fa TEIA 123 BE Aperture Lock To lock apertu
4. Option Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release Release button is pressed _ Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator default is displayed Regardless of the option selected if the in focus indicator is displayed focus will lock while the shutter release button is pressed halfway Focus lock continues until the shutter is released a3 Dynamic AF Area If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic area AF C23 pg 76 is selected in continuous servo AF focus mode C pg 74 the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points Choose the number of points from 9 21 and 51 based on subject movement Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Option Description i If the subject leaves the selected focus point the fag 2 Points camera will focus based on information from the default surrounding eight focus points Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track 3 21 21 points teehee eee eee eee eee err Pree eee eee tee ee eee If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 20 focus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably
5. Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock More About Playback Playback Options This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details the operations that can be performed during playback Full Frame Playback ssccsssesessscssosssessscscesesesseces pg 226 Photo Information ssecssscsssssscsesesssssscsssssececsceeees pg 229 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback pg 241 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM ss0000 pg 243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion pg 244 Deleting Individual Photograph scecsssseees pg 245 225 Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the P button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor Multi selector Sub command dial t button gt button MENU button ER button O n button button button Main command dial Rotate Tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 287 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 228 226
6. ee 116 120 10 Aperture lock iCOn ss ssss0111 124 11 Aperture f number 118 120 Aperture number of stops 119 385 12 ISO sensitivity indicator 104 16 Flash ready indicator 199 Auto ISO sensitivity 17 FV lock indicator cscssssseseees 199 iNdiCator eee ee 106 18 Flash sync indicator eee 326 13 ISO sensitivity PENRE ER 104 19 Aperture stop indicator 119 385 14 Frame COUnt sesesesessesesessoereseseses 49 20 Battery indicator eese 48 Number of exposures 21 Electronic analog exposure FEMA N NG ceereereeseerneerneereeeereenee 49 display oeeccsssssssssssssssssssssssssnssssnnee 122 Number of shots remaining Exposure compensation display before memory buffer fills 88 oc ccseentneentnetntnetneen 128 Preset white balance Tilt indiCAtOF assssssssstsensenses 335 recording indicato 00 151 99 Exposure compensation Exposure compensation TNCICATOL eeseccssescccssssesccecssseeceesene 128 Wall UG sa sssccisssscsviacdsacsiscsandbedesdsaverzurs 128 PC mode indicator ss 259 zs eee T 15 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES sescssscssssecsseesseeseeesseeses 49 Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached pg 187 The flash ready indicator lights when the flash is charged M No Battery When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and doe
7. 279 280 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures To deselect a picture highlight it and press center of multi selector 4 Press to complete the operation A confirmation dialog willbe displayed m highlight Yes and press Dt puter Delete Select this option to delete pictures and their associated voice memos Protected and hidden images will not be deleted Option Description r Selected Delete selected pictures Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for All playback pg 281 If two memory cards are inserted a slot selection dialog will be displayed before deletion Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback Option Description NCD3X Pictures in all folders created with the D3X will be default visible during playback All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Only pictures in the current folder will be visible Current 3 during playback Hide Image Hide or reveal selected pictures Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card Option Description Select set Hide or reveal selected pictures Deselect all Reveal all pictures 7 Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image 281 282 Display Mode Choose the information available in the ia Displa
8. i 100NCD3X DSC_0O 15 12 2008 10 15 Press the t button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press PJ Delete To delete multiple images or to delete images from the second of two memory cards use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 281 58 Image Recording Options This section describes how to choose image area quality and size and how to choose the role played by memory card slot 2 IMAGEIATC AR cccseccrcsseccecssseccrtecccecesetecevoriectreonectscs cceseriettsecte pg 60 Image Quality eeaeee eaa AA E eaei pg 66 Image Si ZE n a AA A Et ERS pg 70 IlOI EPA E A E E A E cats eTete eects pg 72 59 60 Image Area The camera s FX format 35 9 x 24 0 mm Image area image sensor can be used to record pictures with an image area picture angle t equivalent to a 35mm 135 format film EE Choose ase area a camera Image area option in the shooting menu Image area is selected using the At the default setting of Auto DX crop the camera will automatically crop pictures to the DX picture angle when a DX format lens is attached The Choose image area option can be used to select a 35mm picture angle or to crop photographs to the DX format picture angle or to a 5 4 aspect ratio EE Auto DX Crop Choose whether to automatically select a DX crop when a DX lens is attached Option Description On default
9. Edit comment amp Select image Copy d 0 155 4 Highlight a source image E White balance 1 Select image Highlight the source image To apa 100 1 1100 2 100 3 view the highlighted image full frame press the R button Tp y ERIN PRE Set E Zoom If two memory cards are inserted the slot can be selected by holding the m9 button and pressing A The menu shown at right will be displayed pg 228 highlight the desired slot and press Choose slot Cancel 5 Copy white balance Press the center of the multi selector to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment pg 350 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance ss White balance preset d O d 4 and press gt to select another Ga Preset manual preset E gt Change Set Edit comment Select image Copy H0 Y c R 156 EE Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value 1 Select PRE Preset manual Fluorescent Y Direct sunlight Highlight Preset manual in AK 2 cout the white balance menu S ee pg 140 and press P PHL PRE Preset manual Select a preset E White balance Le Highlight the desired preset _ FS and press the center of the e ha multi selector To select th
10. Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter Speed 1 8000 30 s in steps of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV bulb X250 Flash sync speed X 1 250 s synchronizes with shutter at 250 s or slower Release Release mode S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed live view self timer Mur mirror up Frame advance rate e DX format 24 x 16 Up to 5 fps CL or 5 7 fps CH e Other image areas Up to 5 fps Self timer Can be selected from 2 5 10 and 20 s duration Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using 1 005 segment RGB sensor Metering method e Matrix 3D color matrix metering II type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if user provides lens data e Center weighted Weight of 75 given to12 mm circle in center of frame Diameter of circle can be changed to 8 15 or 20 mm or weighting can be based on average of entire frame non CPU lenses use 12 mm circle or average of entire frame e Spot Meters 4 mm circle about 1 5 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU lens is used Range ISO 100 f 1 4 lens 20 C 68 F e Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV e Spot metering 2 20 EV Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and Al Exposure mode Programm
11. Copy image s destination Copy selected photographs to specified 1 Choose Select image s Highlight Select image s and press gt Copy image s T iSelect image s gt cl 2 Choose the source folder Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press gt we Cory image s D iSelect image s 101NCD3X 102NCD3X 103NCD3X 283 3 Preselect all or protected me conyimagels J Default image selection images er 5 Highlight one of the following N EEEE Select protected images options and press gt e Deselect all No images will be preselected Choose this option when selecting individual images by hand e Select all images Preselect all images in the current folder Choose this option when selecting all or most images in the current folder to be copied e Select protected images Preselect all protected images in the current folder 4 select images ia Deselect all Images preselected in Step 3 To E are marked by a v icon To a S malai select additional images or s Ecs deselect preselected pictures Oset EDJ00m OOK highlight the image and press the center of the multi selector Press to return to the Copy image s menu when selection is complete nai 3 10 100 3 5 Choose Select destination folder Y iSelect image s 100 a T c Highlight Select destination o Career e folder and press gt 28
12. pg 271 l Disconnect USB cable M USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 6 AC adapter When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to SRGB pg 183 263 BE Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Select MTP PTP as If the USB option in the camera setup menu has been changed from the default setting of MTP PTP display the USB menu and select MTP PTP pg 257 Y lt W Mass Storage o IE MTP P TP Turn the camera off 3 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 4 Turn the camera on A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display 264 EE Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or gt to view additional pictures or press the HQ button and rotate the main command dial right to zoom in on the current frame pg 243 Press gt to return to full frame playback To view six pictures at a time press the center of the multi selector Use the multi se
13. 24 25 26 27 28 29 29 Image comment indicator 350 Beep indicator sssss ssssssessee 320 Exposure compensation INd CAtOT seesi 128 Exposure and flash bracketing INA CATOT ssasssesssinssessesasecesoniniasescenss 131 White balance bracketing INd CATOT ssisssinasessstasszasconnsesesntnns 135 Electronic analog exposure dISPlaY nispasisi 122 Exposure compensation 128 Exposure and flash bracketing progress indicator sses 131 WB bracketing progress INdICAtOT sssssssssssssssssssessssssseeerssssse 135 PC connection indicator 259 Tilt INiCATOL ee eeeesssstecesseceesees 335 10 The Rear Control Panel gE E DY ESENE NORM BA A 4 1SO AUTO REM pw I o AN Bah al o aK s LCD Illuminators Rotating the power switch toward 8 activates the exposure meters and the control panel backlights LCD illuminators allowing the displays to be read in the dark After the power switch is released the illuminators will remain lit for six seconds at default settings while the exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward 8 again Power switch 1 Image quality JPEG images 67 2 Remaining indicato 49 3 IMAGE S ZE on essecssesssessncsssccnsseseene 71 4 ISO sensitivity indicator 104 Auto ISO sensitivity INdiCatO sinnani 106 5 ISO sensitivi
14. Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection A Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire A Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury A Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation A Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following
15. If On Mode A is selected the main command dial will be used to set aperture in exposure mode A only This setting also applies to the command dials for vertical shooting Reverse rotation Change main sub 341 Option Description Aperture setting At the default setting of Sub command dial aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is selected for Change main sub If Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial If Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens with an aperture ring is attached when the mode dial is rotated to Ly live view will not start and the shutter release will be disabled Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached Menus and playback At the default setting of Off the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu highlight bar up or down The sub command dial is used to display additional ph
16. PRE EIT Rear control panel I id 7 Viewfinder 1 Rear control panel Ne SS E Viewfinder Select preset d 0 If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately select preset d 0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until d 0 is displayed in the rear control panel M Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 318 The default setting is six seconds Preset d 0 The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d 0 automatically replacing the previous value for this preset no confirmation dialog will be displayed A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list PRE Select WSet To use the new value for white balance select preset d 0 if no value has been measured for white balance before d 0 is selected white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight The new white balance value will remain in preset d 0 until white balance is measured again By copying preset d 0 to one of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance up to five white balance values can be stored pg 154 153 154 EE Copying White Balance from d 0 to Presets d 1 d 4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d
17. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D3X CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exce
18. curtain sync is selected when button is released 2 In exposure modes P and A flash sync mode will be set to slow rear curtain sync when the button is released SSiow 3 icon blinks if flash unit does not support red eye reduction REAR 4 Red eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes P and A In modes and M red eye reduction is selected when the button is released 196 Studio Flash Systems Rear curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems as the correct synchronization can not be obtained Shutter Speed and Aperture Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when a Speedlight is used Mode Shutter speed Aperture See page p Set automatically by camera E 1 1 1 2 A 114 1 250 s 60 s Set automatically 5 Value selected by user by camera 116 1 250 s 30 s 2 Set automatically by camera A 1 1 1 2 118 250 s 60 s Value selected a Value selected by user by user 120 S 1 250 s 30 s 2 1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync slow rear curtain sync and slow sync with red eye reduction flash modes 2 Speeds as fast as s 000 s are available with optional SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 flash units when 1 250 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 326 3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity When setting aperture in exposure modes fi and M consult the table of flash ranges provided wi
19. pg 128 Main command dial Top control panel Shutter speed lock exposure mode 5 or M coza pg 123 Main command dial AF S REM m Gc ve Top control panel Aperture lock exposure mode F or M pg 124 button Sub command dial AF S REM foo A Al Top control panel 19 20 Activate or cancel bracketing select number of shots in bracketing sequence pp BKT button Main command dial Top control panel 131 134 Select bracketing exposure increment pg 132 BKT button Sub command dial Top control panel HE White Balance Press the WB button and rotate the command dials Choose a white balance setting pg 141 WB button Main command dial Rear control panel Fine tune SSS white balance a pg 146 set 5 Tel GES color h wy ot ne COL VSB pg 147 or WB button Sub command dial Rear control panel choose a white balance preset pg 158 Bl Flash Settings Press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial Choose flash Ta mode pg 196 5 button Main command dial Top control panel The Fn Button Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 333 the Fn button and command dials can be used to sele
20. sessssssssssecssssescesseccssesecsecsssuseecsseesesneeeses 8 The Rear Control Panel sssssssssssesessesssecsesssseecsecssseesccsssnseesssnse 10 The Viewfinder Display ssssscssssccsssecssssseccseesesnseessneesesnecssaees 12 The Shooting Information Display ssssscsssssccsseceeseeseseees 14 The Command Dials ou essssssssssccssseseceensssecseccsseessccsssseseeensnsecsesses 16 Quick Start Guide Tutorial 25 Camera MONS visisssscsssrstassscseesssaiessiasvessrascissesavsavesnsssevsansnstoevesnieassitcess 26 Using Camera Menus ssssssssscssescsessssseccssscsseccsseesnecsneecsseeenseesses 28 TS EE E E scassssttouates 31 First Steps eree r E E E E EE Charge the Battery sescssssscsssssccsecssssseccsseccssusesssnseessueecseneeseas Insert the Battery cecsssccssessessseccesseccsseceesnsecssseseesntecsenseeeeseeees Attach albers i ccisscassennass cazennudssecnndvssentnansssonsdstcensnvagscqnedjndsvncensivaett BaSiG SOUP scscssccsscciecsosisscssnnssciassecssodsssscavecsnssandescusadostedesgisssecinecaensnatse Insert a Memory Card nu ssecsssescssssecssssecccseecessseescsseccesssecssneeeesneeees Formatting Memory Cards ssssscssssssccsssesssnssecsnessesssecssseeseenseees Adjust Viewfinder Focus Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera OD sseessssssssessecsssessssessssessesssneecsessnseeeecesseeseeesnes Adjust Camera Settings sssscsssscsssssscsssessesnsecssseseecssecsssneesssneeesene Re
21. shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off The following can reduce battery life e Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway e Repeated autofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW or TIFF RGB photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter e Using the optional GP 1 GPS unit e Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL4a batteries e Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused e Check the condition of the battery regularly using the Battery info option in the setup menu pg 355 If CAL is displayed for Calibration calibrate the battery using the MH 22 quick charger 441 442 Index Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Symbols a Single point AF 76 77 t Dynamic area AF 76 77 Auto area AF 76 77 S 86 CL 86 88 321 CH 86 88 321 90 Self timer 100 Mup 102 Matrix 110 317 Center weighted 110 316 317 Spot 110 317 P Programm
22. 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights areas that may be overexposed for current channel Press lt or while pressing S button to cycle through channels as B follows B RGB R G all channels red green blue Highlight display off 3 Displayed in yellow if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 E was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 232 4 Some sample histograms are shown below e If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even e If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left e If the image is bright tone distribution will be shifted to the EA right gt A aia Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications 233 BE Shooting Data Page 1 4 MTR SPD AP 1 8000 F2 8 5 EXP MODE ISO_ P Hi 0 3 N 6 GA EXP TUNING 1 3 45 6 N 7 F 85mm g Ta 1 4 10 4 Optional TTL 1 3 J 1 Voice MEMO icon sses 248 8 Lens data eeessesecssseeccessee
23. 313 AF ON b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 314 1 3 step b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 314 1 3 step b3 EV steps for exposure comp pg 314 1 3 step b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 315 Off b5 Center weighted area pg 316 12mm Fine tune optimal exposure pg 316 b6 Matrix metering 0 Center weighted 0 Spot metering 0 c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 318 Off c2 Auto meter off delay pg 318 6s c3 Self timer delay pg 319 10s c4 Monitor off delay pg 319 20s Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom setting bank option will be reset pg 304 Settings in all other banks are unaffected Option Default d1 Beep pg 320 Off Shooting speed pg 321 d2 Continuous high speed 5 fps Continuous low speed 3 fps d3 Max continuous release pg 321 130 d4 File number sequence pg 322 On Control panel viewfinder pg 323 d5 Rear control panel ISO sensitivity Viewfinder display Frame count d6 Shooting info display pg 324 Auto d7 LCD illumination pg 325 Off d8 Exposure delay mode pg 325 Off e1 Flash sync speed pg 326 1 250 s e2 Flash shutter speed pg 327 1 60 s e3 Modeling flash pg 327 On e4 Auto bracketing set pg 328 AE amp flash e5 Auto bracketing Mode M pg 329 Flash speed e6 Bracketing order
24. 346 Ki The Retouch Menu Creating R toUuGKeECIGODIGS vercceccccccesssensceestcsesscecventcenccestatceees pg 363 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu ssseeeeee pg 376 277 gt The Playback Menu Managing Images The playback menu contains the options listed below For information on using the playback menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Delete 281 Playback folder 281 Hide image 281 Display mode 282 Copy image s 283 Image review 287 After delete 287 Rotate tall 287 Slide show 288 Print set DPOF 289 278 Selecting Multiple Pictures To select multiple pictures for Delete pg 281 Hide image pg 281 Print set DPOF pg 272 and direct printing pg 268 1 Highlight a picture a Delete i Selected Set GQZoom ONOK To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the ER button DSC_0001 JPG 15 72 2008 10 15 00 If two memory cards are inserted the slot can be selected by holding the Q button and pressing A ST The menu shown at right will be displayed pg 228 highlight the desired slot and press Choose slot Cancel 2 Press the center of the ia Delete multi selector to select the er highlighted picture i Fii Keh RA e OSet EQZoom WOK Selected pictures are marked by an icon When selecting pictures for printing press the Om button and press A or V to choose the number of copies
25. 388 389 focus 47 ViewNX 163 350 Vignette control 299 Virtual horizon 360 Virtual horizon 99 335 360 Voice memo 248 351 Voice memo 227 246 247 254 Voice memo button 249 352 Voice memo overwrite 249 352 Ww WB 6 146 White balance 140 Auto 140 447 448 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Choose color temp 141 Cloudy 141 Direct sunlight 140 Flash 141 Fluorescent 140 Incandescent 140 Preset manual 141 Shade 141 White balance 139 bracketing 130 135 preset manual 141 148 Wireless 187 261 262 356 387 network 261 transmitter 261 356 Wireless transmitter 356 World time 40 349 Date and time 349 Date format 349 Daylight saving time 349 Time zone 349 WT 4 261 262 356 387 Nikon No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION CE NIKON CORPORATION Printed in Japan SBOC04 11 2008 Nikon Corporation 6MB0391 1 04
26. battery performance Used batteries are a valuable resource Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative Refer to the page numbers in the right most column for more information EE Display Problem Solution Page Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter adjustment lenses Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery 48 Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay 318 319 Viewfinder is out of focus 47 389 Displays turn off without warning or c4 Monitor off delay Unusual characters See A Note on Electronically 407 appear in control panels Controlled Cameras below Control panel or The response times and brightness viewfinder displays are of these displays varies with unresponsive and dim temperature A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances unusual characters may appear in the monitor or control panels and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again In the event o
27. e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II e AF S 600mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF 600mm f 4D ED 2 e AF I 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 300mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II e AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED 2 e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED e AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR e AF I 400mm f 2 8D ED e AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR e AF S 500mm f 4D ED II e AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR 1 Autofocus not supported 2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF S Teleconverter TC 17E II TC 20E Il Compatible Non CPU Lenses If lens data are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 218 many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non CPU lenses If lens data are not specified color matrix metering can not be used and center weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes FA and M when aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring If the maximum aperture has not been specified using Non CPU lens data the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring Aperture priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and 5 The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the top control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder 385 386 Picture Angle and Focal Length The D3X can be used with Nikon len
28. e g players at a football game 2 51 51 points eee eee ee eee ee ed eee EERE EEE eee E EEE If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 50 focus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds 307 308 Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will use 3D tracking to track the subject 51 points and select a new focus point as required Use to 3D tracking quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves the viewfinder remove your finger from the shutter release button 3D and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point f2 3D 3D Tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame See Also For information on using the Fn button and command dials to select the number of focus points for dynamic area AF see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button dials gt Dynamic AF area pg 336 a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On This
29. f7 Customize Command Dials esscssssccsseeceeseecesseeeeeee 341 f8 Release Button to Use Dial ss ssssssssssssssssssssseeessssssee 343 f9 No Memory Card eesssessscssseccsseesccnsecessssecssneecssneecssneeseee 344 f10 Reverse Indicators s sssssssssssssessssssseesesssseeerssssseereesssseee 345 Y The Setup Menu Camera Setup ccccssscsssecssecssessssessseessses 346 Format Memory Card ssssscsssssccssessecsecssseseccsneceesnsecssneeesees 347 LCD Brighthe SS senienas 347 Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning ssssccsssecssseecccssecesseeecesseeeseee 347 Vid o Mode siaiegecatieaciecencattacdiianndacnnianuadaany 348 PADI meannan a E A 348 World TiM Eteinen anna 349 Language ani E ENE AEA EENS 349 Image COMMENE ou esssescssescnssecnsecsseccssccssccessesensccssecessecsseessecs 350 Auto Image Rotation 351 Voice Memo sesser 351 Voice Memo Overwrite 1352 Voice Memo Button ou eessecseecsecssecnssensesscesseesssesssessesseeseees 352 A di Outputs 352 USB nat aE T E E E OA EOE 352 Dust off Ref PhotoO sssssssssssssssseesssseseesssseseeessseeereesssseeressssseee 353 Battery NfO iacsccssacsisstspessisicsscssansdsccniseseavstagasscctossetb aes hansdcasozaviozs 355 Wireless Transmitter cssscsssesccssseccssecesnseccsseecensecssneeeeeee 356 Image Authentication eecsseccssescccsecsssesecesseseecnseeseneteeeee 356 Copyright Information secsssssccssssccsseeecsseececseeseseeecesseees 357
30. for example the effective focal length of a 50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX format 24 x 16 is selected or 55 mm when 5 4 30 x 24 is selected Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D3X e Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL4a EN EL4 pp 32 34 Additional EN EL4a EN EL4 batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives These batteries can be recharged and calibrated using an MH 22 or MH 21 quick Power charger sources e Quick Charger MH 22 MH 21 pp 32 437 The MH 22 MH 21 can be used to recharge and calibrate EN EL4a and EN EL4 batteries AC Adapter EH 6 The EH 6 can be used to power the camera for extended periods Wireless Transmitter WT 4 Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same Wireless network or copied to a computer for long term storage The LAN camera can also be controlled from any computer on the adapters network using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Note that the WT 4 requires an independent power source an EH 6 AC adapter or an EN EL3e battery is recommended See the WT 4 manual for details 387 e Focusing Screens pg 396 The focusing screens available for the D3X are listed below TypeB Brite View NWZ type B focusing screen clear mat
31. glows glows blinks maximum capacity 100 of maximum capacity O glows off off off Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops blinking and the charge lamps turn off About two hours and twenty five minutes are required to fully charge an exhausted battery 5 Remove the battery when charging is complete Remove the battery and unplug the charger Calibration See page 437 for more information on calibration 33 Insert the Battery T Turn the camera off Power switch VO Always turn the camera off J W before inserting or removing ANA batteries 2 Remove the battery chamber cover Lift the battery chamber cover latch turn it to the open 8 position D and remove the BL 4 battery chamber cover 3 Attach the cover to the battery If the battery release is positioned so that the arrow 4 is visible slide the battery release to cover the arrow Insert the two projections on the battery into the matching slots in the cover and slide the battery release to reveal the arrow The BL 4 Battery Chamber Cover The battery can be charged with the BL 4 attached To prevent dust from accumulating inside the battery chamber when the battery is not inserted slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow lt 44 remove the BL 4 from the battery and replace it on the camera The BL 1 battery ch
32. modes Continuous mode Choose the brightness of the focus point display in the viewfinder from Extra high High Normal the default setting and Low Focus point brightness 310 a7 Focus Point Wrap Around Choose whether focus point selection wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another Option Description rocus point selection wraps a e around from top to bottom bottom to top right to left and left s 30 to right so that for example uo gn N Wrap pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display The focus area display is bounded by the outermost focus No wrap default points so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect a8 AF Point Selection Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description Choose from the 51 focus points shown at right 51 points 3 mE AF51 default EREEREER u EEEE Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right Use for quick Sn AF11 11 points focus point selection Bieta Me lt a 311 312 a9 AF ON Button Choose the function performed when the AF 0N button is pressed Option Description AF ON Aare AF ON
33. on and pull the diopter adjustment knob out 2 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter adjustment knob until the viewfinder display focus points and AF area brackets are in sharp focus 3 Replace the diopter adjustment knob Push the diopter adjustment knob back in Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses Corrective lenses available separately pg 389 can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter Before attaching a diopter adjustment viewfinder lens remove the DK 17 viewfinder eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to release the eyepiece lock D and then unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right 47 48 Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera On Before taking photographs turn the camera on and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining as described below 1 Turn the camera on Turn the camera on The control panels will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light Power switch 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the SA viewfinder or top control panel sron Icon Control panel Viewfinder Description Battery fully charged Cm Battery partially discharged al G pes Low battery Prepare to charge battery or ready spare battery Ca cA Shutter release disabled Charge or bli
34. optional flash unit is attached the flash will fire whenever the shutter is released BE The Accessory Shoe Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly on the camera without a sync cable pg 187 The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin such as the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 BE The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as required Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon Speedlights Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information 201 202 Other Shooting Options This chapter covers restoring default settings making multiple exposures interval timer photography and using GPS units and non CPU lenses Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings pg 204 Multiple EXPO SULE eeaeee etae tettesek ESIE rE e EEA pg 206 Interval Timer Photography cscscscssscsesesscsees pg 211 NON CERUILENSES irk scccccccccccesescstectsestescescecacssesseseseserecates pg 218 LETE SA
35. s creative intent Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust or make manual adjustments to individual settings Sharpening Y Contrast Brightness T F Saturation Hue CA CHOK WReset 1 Select a Picture Control Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set Picture Control menu pg 164 and press gt es Set Picture Control 10 ED Standard ENL Neutral HEV Vivid EMC Monochrome e QGrid GAdiust 2 Adjust settings Press A or W to highlight the desired setting and press lt or gt to choose a value pg 167 Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted or E Vivid a Quick adjust Sharpening m Y Contrast o Brightness o Saturation a EA GQGrid COOK Reset i select Quick adjust pg 167 to choose a preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the button 3 Press Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk in the Set Picture Control menu 166 es Set Picture Control 6 ED Standard E GAdiust Bl Picture Control Settings Option Description Quick adjust Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pict
36. shooting conditions and type of lens TIFF and JPEG images may exhibit unevenness or variations in peripheral brightness while custom Picture Controls and Nikon Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect Take test shots and view the results in the monitor Vignette control does not apply to multiple exposures pg 206 DX format images pg 60 or images created with Image overlay pg 371 The effects of vignette control can not be previewed in live view pg 90 299 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds Option Description Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8s are processed to reduce noise While photographs are being eam il 23s processed Jat ar will blink in the shutter speed aperture displays for a period of time On approximately equal to the current shutter speed In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Photographs can not be taken until processing is complete and dal mr has cleared from the displays Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete Off default Long exposure noise reduction off High ISO NR Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Option Description HIGH Hig
37. the exposure meters will not be activated when the multi selector is pressed f3 Photo Info Playback At the default setting of Info A W Playback lt gt pressing A or V in full frame playback changes the photo information displayed while pressing lt or gt displays additional images To reverse the role of the multi selector buttons so that pressing A or W displays additional images and pressing lt or gt changes the photo information displayed select Info lt gt PlaybackA V f4 Assign FUNC Button Choose the role played by the Fn button either by itself FUNC button press or when used in combination with the command dials FUNC button dials BE FUNC Button Press Selecting FUNC button press for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options Option Description Preview Press the Fn button to preview depth of field pg 113 Press the Fn button to lock flash value SB 900 FV lock SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only pg 198 Press again to cancel FV lock W AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed M AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and He ae remains locked until the button is pressed a second release time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off AE lock Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed a
38. 0 to any of the other presets d 1 d 4 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg 140 and press gt White balance EI Choose color temp 2J PRE Preset manual gt 2 Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector White balance A id 0 d 1 d 2 Y A PRE Select Set d 1 3 Copy d 0 to the selected preset Highlight Copy d 0 and press If comment has been created for d 0 pg 159 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset eS White balance E Preset manual et Set a Edit comment amp Select image Copy d 0 EE Copying White Balance from a Photograph d 1 d 4 Only Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the memory card to a selected preset d 1 d 4 only Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset d 0 1 Select PRE Preset es White balance manual C Flere Highlight Preset manual in d 2 cous the white balance menu pg oo EI Choose color temp 140 and press gt 2 PRE Preset manual gt l 2 Select a destination E White balance Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector PRE Select Set 3 Choose Select image E White balance E Preset manual Highlight Select image and E press gt Set
39. 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions WxHxD Approx 159 5 x 157 x 87 5 mm 6 3 x 6 2 x 3 4 in Weight Approx 1 220 g 2 Ib 11 oz without battery memory card body cap or accessory shoe cover Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain 436 Calibrating Batteries The MH 22 quick charger is equipped with a battery calibration feature Calibrate the battery as required to ensure the accuracy of the camera and charger battery level displays If the calibration lamp for the current battery chamber blinks when a battery is inserted the battery needs to be calibrated To begin calibration press the calibration button for the current chamber for about a second The time needed to calibrate the battery is shown by the Chamber lamps green om _ao Charge lamps green Calibration lamps yellow CHARGE 100 O 6h 80 O 4h 50 O 2h l charge and calibration lamps Calibration buttons
40. 1 step Lo 1 100 200 400 800 1600 Hi 1 Hi 2 If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will be rounded up to the nearest available setting Hi 0 3 Hi 2 The settings Hi 0 3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 2 EV over ISO 1600 ISO 2000 6400 equivalent Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion Lo 0 3 Lo 1 The settings Lo 0 3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV below ISO 100 ISO 80 50 equivalent Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright Contrast is slightly higher than normal in most cases ISO sensitivities of ISO 100 or above are recommended See Also For information on Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value see page 314 For information using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 300 105 106 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control If Off the default setting is chosen for the ISO sensitivity auto control option in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user see page 104 If On is chosen ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user flash level is adjusted appropriately The maxi
41. 155 balance e NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image 66 White balance bracketing T option selected for image unavailable Multiple exposure mode is in 209 effect 410 Problem Solution Page Effects of Picture Control A auto is selected for sharpening contrast or saturation differ from image to For consistent results over a series 168 image of photographs choose a setting other than A auto Metering cannot pe Autoexposure lock is in effect 127 changed Exposure compensation Choose exposure mode F or A 128 can not be used Reddish areas appearin Reddish areas and uneven textures photos may appear in long time exposures Turn long exposure 300 Textures are uneven noise reduction on when shooting at shutter speeds of hush ir 411 412 HE Playback Problem Solution Page Flashing areas appear in images Shooting data appear Press A or W to choose photo i i 229 282 on images information displayed A graph appears during playback NEF RAW image is Photo was taken at image quality of NEF 67 not played back JPEG Some photos are not displayed during Select All for Playback folder 281 playback Tall portrait e Select On for Rotate tall 287 orientation photos e Photo was taken with Off selected 351 are displayed in for Auto image rotation wide landscape Camera
42. Compatible LenseS s sessesesssessesesosesessososesescosososeseseoso pg 382 OtherAccessSorieS aretoetara seanoir s pg 387 Caring for the Cameta csccscssscscsssesscscsccssscececssseeers pg 395 SUOLAG E OE A etree nee pg 395 GGA Bare E ecto eeceaascsesnnecesyscresnvcaterereeecrmssrrenrinares pg 395 Replacing the FOCUSING Screen scsscccssecseccssecessecesnecensecesees pg 396 Replacing the Clock Battery ssssssssssssessssssssessssssseoesssssecesssssse pg 398 MMe Low Pass FINEN eaa e A pg 400 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions pg 403 Troubleshootinge eeens eae ereere pg 407 ErrOnMesSaGes strccccsccccccecsvscecesesceccscscecocscececesvessccscesseaceces pg 414 AD DOIIX virraesccccussscnceecsececsseccscsecosccisrseetsusinessecseneseaseeseres pg 421 Specifications ccsccsccccecccecccsecscsucsssosscouresscscescstestecsecseseeses pg 431 381 382 Compatible Lenses Camera setting Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode 3 eee M Eales gt c gt S M 3D Color Lens accessory rangefinder Type G or D AF Nikkor 3 AF S AF I Nikkor K 681 ell E x ml PC E NIKKOR series v5 V 5 v PC Micro 85mm Cc 2 5 6 3 cy f 2 8D4 Ma AF S AF I Teleconverter 8 v3 V iVv iVv4 iVvi 4 wn gt Other AF Nikkor 3 except lenses for F3AF d al alla Al P Nikkor Vv ViVvivi l
43. Compression JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or optimal image quality The JPEG compression option in the shooting menu can be used to choose the type of compression pg 68 NEF RAW JPEG If only one memory card is used only the JPEG image will be displayed when photographs taken at NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic are viewed on the camera Deleting the JPEG image deletes the NEF RAW copy If two memory cards are inserted and RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 is selected for Slot 2 deleting the JPEG copy from the memory card in slot 2 has no effect on the NEF RAW copy on the memory card in slot 1 pg 72 The Image Quality Menu Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in the shooting menu pg 290 67 BE The JPEG Compression Menu The JPEG compression item in the shooting menu offers the following options for JPEG images Option Description A A Images are compressed to produce relatively ie size priority uniform file size Quality varies with scene default recorded Optimal image quality File size varies with Optimal quality ee erick 68 BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu Type The NEF RAW recording gt Type item in the shooting menu offers the following compression options for NEF RAW images Option Description Lossless NEF images are compressed using a reversible ONS compres
44. Exposure MOE ccsessssesesseeesees 112 Flexible program indicator 115 Shutter speed lock icon 123 Shutter speed 116 120 Exposure compensation VAN UC saena 128 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence Focal length NON CPU lenses scssessesseesees 220 Multiple exposure indicator 208 Aperture lock icon wesc 124 Aperture f number 118 120 Aperture number of stops 119 385 Exposure and flash bracketing increment ssseeseccecccssocseesssssssssre WB bracketing increment Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses cscsssesseeees 220 Aperture stop indicator 119 385 Number of exposures remaining K appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures Frame COUN essescsescssesssesseeneees Manual lens number Memory card indicator Memory card indicator SIOEN EEE AA Custom settings bank Shooting menu bank 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Flash sync indicator 0 326 Flash MOe cesccssssccssesscessecessees 194 Clock battery indicator 41 398 FV lock indicator eescessecceeees 199 Interval timer indicator 214 Image comment indicator 350 Copyright information indicator 1357 Beep indicator 320 Exposure compensation TNCICATON 0 ssaeeecssseeccssteceeseeceense
45. Flash MOde ssessccsseccssseecesseeees 194 6 Shooting menu bank 291 7 Custom settings bank 304 8 Memory card indicator slot 1 sceccossisccpssessessecssacesssaseoves 42 45 9 Memory card indicator SLOC 2 vrecscsssssssssssssssessssssssseseess 42 45 10 Number of exposures remaining ssssssssssssssssssssosesceocsecsooee 49 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 88 Capture mode indicato 256 11 Aperture stop indicator 119 385 12 Aperture f number 118 120 Aperture number of STOPS sissscoressesssernsccocennavecnsere 119 385 Exposure and flash bracketing INCEMENT esccesccesssessscsrssssessses 132 WB bracketing increment 136 Number of shots per interval srini 214 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses uu PC mode indicator 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 20 Battery indicator 48 Frame COUN ecseecseecseesseesseeseens 49 Preset white balance recording indicatov Manual lens number K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES eessseeccssscsseccsscesseesssens 49 FV lock indicator csseccsseessees 199 Flash sync indicatot 0 326 Clock battery indicator 41 398 GPS connection indicator 223 Focus mode indicator 0 74 Interval timer indicator 214 Multiple exposure INICATOL seeesesccssseescccnnsseceneenssess Aperture lock icon
46. L 70 LAN 387 Language 39 349 LCD 10 325 347 404 405 LCD brightness 347 LCD illumination 325 Lens 37 84 382 attaching 37 cap 37 38 cap rear 37 compatible 382 CPU 38 384 distance information 193 focus ring 38 mounting index 37 38 non CPU 218 385 data 219 removing 38 type D 384 type G 384 Live view 90 Live view mode 91 94 Hand held 91 Tripod 94 Release mode 91 Live view 90 99 Lo 105 Lock mirror up for cleaning 347 Long exp NR 300 M M manual focus mode 74 83 M medium 70 Magenta 144 370 Manage Picture Control 170 Manual 83 92 120 Mass Storage 257 352 Matrix 110 317 334 Max continuous release 321 Memory buffer 88 89 Memory card 42 347 394 capacity of 427 formatting 45 347 slot 42 156 228 Metering 110 317 334 center weighted 110 matrix 110 selector 53 111 spot 110 Microdrive 6 42 394 Mirror 86 102 lock up for cleaning 400 Modeling flash 327 Monitor 14 57 90 226 229 319 395 Monitor brightness 99 347 Monitor off delay 319 Monochrome 369 Black and white 369 445 446 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Cyanotype 369 Sepia 369 Mounting index 37 38 MTP PTP 257 352 Multi selector 332 Multi selector center button 331 Multiple exposure 206 Multiple exposure 206 My Menu 376 Add items 376 Rank items
47. Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 available separately pg 391 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional Speedlights should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This
48. Orientation Photographs When framing shots in portrait tall orientation use the command dials to select the focus area For more information see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 337 See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a6 Focus point illumination pg 310 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a7 Focus point wrap around pg 311 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a8 AF point selection pg 311 For information on choosing the role of the AF 0N button for vertical shooting see Custom Setting a10 Vertical AF ON button pg 313 For information on changing the role of the multi selector center button see Custom Setting f1 Multi selector center button pg 331 79 80 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus pg 82 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus J D point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus 2 Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder Single servo AF Focus will lock automatically when the in
49. R200 Controlled remotely using the SB 900 SB 800 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander Wireless Speedlight Commander SU 800 See page 187 for more information Water guards Water Guard WG AS1 The optional WG AS1 is a water guard that covers the base of SB 900 flash units mounted on the D3X increasing the SB 900 s splash resistance by protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and spray PC card adapters e EC AD1 PC Card Adapter The EC AD1 PC card adapter allows Type CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots Software e Capture NX 2 A complete photo editing package with such advanced editing features as selection control points and an auto retouch brush e Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk e Image Authentication Determine whether photographs taken with image authentication on have been modified after shooting Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet Body cap BF 1B and BF 1A Body Caps The body cap keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place 391 392 Remote terminal accessories The D3X is equipped with a ten pin remote terminal for remote control and automatic photography The terminal i
50. RAW Lossless 27 6 MB 100 24 compressed 12 bit NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14 bit aaeME af 28 NEF RAW _ Compressed 12 bit ene as 29 NEF RAW _ Compressed 14 bit ZAMR 14 2H NEF RAW Uncompressed 38 9 MB 100 22 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed a 50 6 MB 77 21 14 bit L 73 5 MB 53 22 TIFF RGB M 41 5 MB 94 23 S 18 6 MB 210 30 L 14 1 MB 277 44 JPEG fine 3 M 7 9 MB 491 78 S 3 6 MB 1000 80 L 7 1 MB 552 61 JPEG normal M 4 0 MB 976 80 S 1 8 MB 2100 83 L 3 6 MB 1000 69 JPEG basic M 2 1 MB 1800 82 S 0 9 MB 4100 83 427 EE DX Format 24 x 16 Image Area Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless A compressed 12 bit 12MB Ace NEF RAW Lossless _ compressed 14 bit be Me Ie 32 NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit 10 1 MB ie fe NEF RAW _ Compressed 14 bit 12 2 MB 299 3 NEF RAW Uncompressed E 17 0 MB 229 29 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed 22 1 MB 176 32 14 bit L 31 7 MB 123 24 TIFF RGB M 17 9 MB 218 29 S 8 1 MB 484 40 L 6 1 MB 644 76 JPEG fine M 3 4 MB 1100 130 S 1 6 MB 2400 130 L 3 1 MB 1200 130 JPEG normal M 1 8 MB 2200 130 S 0 8 MB 4800 130 L 1 6 MB 2400 130 JPEG basic M 0 9 MB 4100 130 S 0 4 MB 8900 130 428 1 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in mem
51. a shutter speed g eso Rotate the main command dial to choose the desired shutter speed Shutter speed can be set to x 250 the flash sync speed limit or to values between 30s 39 and s 000 s aaa Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects high shutter speeds to freeze motion AF S REM ZZ fan G 16 Fast shutter speed 1 000 s Slow shutter speed 1 10 s Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting see page 123 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot See Also See page 416 for information on what to do if flashing tus ti indicator appears in the shutter speed displays 117 PN ned 118 A Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in aperture priority auto 1 Select exposure mode A Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until A is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel MODE button 2 Choose an aperture Rotate the sub command dial to choose the desired aperture from values between the minimum and maximum for the lens ba HR AF S REM m A Al Sub command dial Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field see page 113 bringing both foreground and ba
52. and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fi AF lock only Focus locks while the vertical AF ON button is pressed 313 b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value This option determines whether adjustments Option to sensitivity are made in increments 113 1 3 step equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV default 1 2 1 2 step 1 1step b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed aperture and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1 3 EV 2 EV or 1 EV Option Description Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments equivalent to 3 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV 1 3 step 13 default Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments 1 2 1 2 step equivalent to 1 2 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 2 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments 1 step equivalent to 1 EV The bracketing increment is set to 1 EV b3 EV Steps for Exposure Comp This option determines whether adjustments Option to exposure compensation are made in 1 3 step increments equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV default 1 2 1 2 step 1 1step 314 b4 Easy Exposure Compensation This option controls whether the E4 button is needed to set exposure compensation
53. are not reset when a two button reset is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings bank No default Exit without changing Custom Settings a Autofocus a1 AF C Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority or only when the camera is in focus focus priority in continuous servo AF To select continuous servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to C Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release default button is pressed Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in Release Or ice focus In continuous mode frame rate slows for improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast S Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator Es Focus is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will not lock when the in focus indicator is displayed The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released 305 306 a2 AF S Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus focus priority or whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority in single servo AF To select single servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to S
54. both photo and voice memo e Sound only Select this option and press the t button to delete only the voice memo To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo press P See Also To delete multiple images use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 281 The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted pg 287 Voice Memos Recording and Playback The camera is equipped with a built in microphone allowing voice memos to be added to photographs Voice memos can be played back over the camera s built in speaker Recording Voice Memos cssssecsscsesscecssssscececeeees pg 248 Playing Voice M MO6 ssccesssececsesesssececseseccssecseees pg 253 247 Recording Voice Memos Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to photographs using the built in microphone Readying the Camera for Recording Before recording voice memos choose the desired options for the Voice memo pg 248 Voice memo overwrite pg 249 and Voice memo button pg 249 options in the setup menu HE Voice Memo This option controls whether voice memos E Voice memo are recorded automatically or manually The iE following options are available Y TT E amp 5s On Auto and manual fe WY Manual only Option Description Off default Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode Sele
55. e A E pg 221 203 204 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the ISO and WB buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panels turn off briefly while settings are reset ISO WB button button Option Default Option Default Focus point Center Shutter speed Off Exposure mode Programmed bas p auto Bracketing off Flexible program off Flash mode Front curtain Exposure off sync compensation FV lock off AE hold off Multiple off Aperture lock Off exposure 1 Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 340 is unaffected 2 Number of shots is reset to zero Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV exposure flash bracketing or 1 white balance bracketing The following shooting menu options will also be reset Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 291 Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected Option Default Option Default Image quality JPEG Normal White balance Auto Image size Large ISO sensitivity 100 Fine tuning off If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored See Also See page 422 for a list of default settings 205 206 Multiple Exposure Follow t
56. exposure compensation with each shot while in the case of flash bracketing pg 131 flash level is varied with each shot i TTL and in the case of the SB 900 and SB 800 auto aperture flash control modes only see pages 186 and 189 Only one photograph is produced each time the shutter is released meaning that several shots are required to complete the bracketing sequence Exposure and flash bracketing are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure and there is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot In white balance bracketing pg 135 the camera creates multiple images each time the shutter is released each with a different white balance adjustment Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence White balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or experimenting with different white balance settings See Also At default settings the camera varies both exposure and flash level Custom Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg 328 is used to choose the type of bracketing performed EE Exposure and Flash Bracketing 1 Select flash or exposure bracketing Perazzi Choose the type of bracketing to be ATR AE aan performed using Custom Setting e4 ht Auto bracketing set pg 328 Choose We WB bracketing AE amp flash to vary both exposure and flash level the default setting AE only to vary only exposure or Flash only to vary
57. focus 23 24 6 Check camera settings pp 48 51 Battery level Exposure f Image size White balance mode 25 F55 Zo AF SHOOT TY fl aaa A Number of exposures remaining count Frame ISO sensitivity Image quality Top control panel Rear control panel 7 Select single servo autofocus pg 53 74 Rotate the focus mode selector to S single servo autofocus Focus and shoot pp 55 56 Press the shutter release button halfway to focus then press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph View the photograph pg 57 fi 100NCD3X DSC_OOt 15 12 2008 1 10 Delete unwanted photos pg 58 Press t twice to delete the current photograph T button Delete Yes leis G 100NCD3X DSC_000 15 12 2008 _10 15 0 Tutorial This section describes how to use the camera menus how to ready the camera for use and how to take your first pictures and play them back FinStsSt Sins ssecccsscsccessesssesccrrsecrsssceeterturcietrssneaiteeeersastivees pg 32 GhargertheBattehy a AEE steerer teens sarc pg 32 Insert the Battery Attach aleni noen a a aaa A aucun a BaSiGSetu oae eaa a T EN Inserta Memory Cardinia tretes eei eeii taaa e ii Eesi pg 42 Formatting Memory Cards sscssssscsssscsssecsssecsscccssecessecs
58. have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d3 Max continuous release pg 321 For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 427 89 g 90 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View Select live view mode to frame pictures in the monitor The following options are available Hand held 4 Choose when taking hand held shots of moving subjects or when framing photographs at angles that make it difficult to use the viewfinder pg 91 Camera focuses normally using phase detection autofocus Tripod 5 Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod pg 94 You can zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor for precise focus making this option suitable for static subjects Contrast detect autofocus can be used to compose photographs with the subject positioned anywhere in the frame Phase Detection Versus Contrast Detect AF The camera normally uses phase detection autofocus in which focus is adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor When Tripod is selected in live view however the camera uses contrast detect autofocus in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor and adjusts focus to p
59. is corrupt Memory card dee Images created with Cannot select not contain images A other devices can not 364 this file that can be be retouched retouched 419 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Check printer To A resume select Check printer Printer error Continue if 263 available ETON _ lnsert paper of Check paper Paper in printer is correct sizeandselect 263 not of selected size 7 Continue Paper jam Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select 263 printer Continue F Insert paper of Out of paper Printeris outo selected size and 263 paper select Continue Check ink Check ink To resume x Inkerror A 263 supply select Continue Out of ink Printer is out of ink Replaceink ang 263 select Continue 420 See printer manual for more information Appendix The Appendix covers the following topics e Defaults Memory Card Capacity nn cesessssessesssessssseessnssecessseescsneseesnneeecssees EXPOSULE Program airson E aaa o EE S s 421 Defaults The following defaults are restored either with a two button reset or using Reset shooting menu or Reset custom settings BE Defaults Restored with a Two Button Reset pg 204 Option Default ISO sensitivity pg 104 100 Image quality pg 66 JPEG nor
60. is low 2 Only available when optional WT 4 wireless transmitter is connected and MTP PTP selected for USB pg 352 346 Format Memory Card Format the card in the selected slot Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required m During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the s tt and MODE buttons for more than two seconds pg 45 LCD Brightness Press A or W to choose from seven settings Pomme for monitor brightness Choose higher values for increased brightness lower values for reduced brightness See Also For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view see page 99 Lock Mirror up for Cleaning Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the low pass filter that protects the camera image sensor pg 400 347 348 Video Mode When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the A V out connector be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard NTSC or PAL HDMI The camera is equipped with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface connector allowing pictures to be played back on high definition televisions or monitors using a type A cable available separately from commercial suppliers Before connecting the camera to high
61. larger aperture 107 108 Exposure Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure This section describes the options available to control exposure including metering exposure mode exposure lock exposure compensation and bracketing Metern oee aeee e AASE AEEA er pg 110 Exposure MOCO wateccrecscccscce scseccorsccesesscssesctetsccceeceonsesseee pg 112 R Programmed Auton eea aea test pg 114 S Shutter Priority AUtO ae E A E AE AE EE pg 116 A Aperture Priority AUTO cessescsneccssecseccseecneccnsecneceneecneeesees pg 118 Haat ual iitassccceron se cerca AS pg 120 Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock scccsecsrsees pg 123 Autoexposure AE LOCK ccsccsssssssscsssecesseceecececees pg 125 Exposure Compensation sessssscsesesssosscosscssscsoscsosssoe pg 128 BracketinG icccecctsccscccuscestectesecccsssssctccssssctcocccacersctacssseaeoeezs pg 130 109 Metering Metering determines how the camera sets exposure The following options are available Method Description S amp S 3D color matrix Il Recommended in most situations Camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution of brightness color distance and composition for natural results Center weighted Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in PEN m center of frame defaults to 12 mm 2 circle in center of viewfinder if CPU _ ee len
62. lenses can NOT be used with the D3X e TC 16AS AF teleconverter AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm f e Non Al lenses 2 8 AF 200mm f 3 5 ED AF e Lenses that require the AU 1 Teleconverter TC 16 focusing unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 f 5 6 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 or earlier Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 e PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 851001 906200 e 2 1cm f 4 e PC 35mm f 3 5 old type e Extension Ring K2 e Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type e 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 174041 174180 142361 143000 e 360 1200mm f 11 ED serial Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers numbers 174031 174127 200111 200310 e 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring CPU contacts Aperture ring Niko ae ton 3 ala CPU lens 7 Type Glens Type D lens The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF lenses e AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 500mm f 4D ED e AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED e AF 500mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 600mm f 4D ED II
63. no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 7 6 Clean the filter Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter 7 Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap 401 402 M Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised e If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately vV Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D3X however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged
64. on page 292 Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long e Copyright Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 292 Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long e Attach copyright information Select this option to attach copyright information to E Copyright information Done all subsequent photographs Attach t a copyright information can be turned on 5 riven and off by highlighting it and pressing gt amp Attach copyright information vV Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright information option 357 Save Load Settings Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card in slot 1 if the memory card is full an error will be displayed pg 417 Menu Option Playback Display mode Image review After delete Rotate tall Shooting all banks Shooting menu bank File naming Slot 2 Image quality Image size Image area JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance with fine tuning and presets d 0 d 4 Set Picture Control Color space Acti
65. option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject Option Description AF Long When the distance to the subject changes abruptly the __ Normal camera waits for the specified period long normal or default short before adjusting the distance to the subject This prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance Off to the subject changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession AFE AFE Short a5 AF Activation This option controls whether both the shutter release button and the AF 0N button can be used to initiate autofocus or whether autofocus is only initiated when the AF 0N button is pressed Option Description Shutter AF ON default AF ON only Autofocus can only be performed using the AF ON button Autofocus can be performed with the AF 0N button or by pressing the shutter release button halfway 309 a6 Focus Point Illumination The options in this menu control whether or not the focus points are illuminated Option Description Manual Choose On the default setting to display the active focus mode focus point in manual focus mode Choose On the default setting to display the active focus point in CH continuous high speed and CL continuous low speed
66. pg 128 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials see note below The setting RESET On Auto selected using the command dial is reset when the reset camera or exposure meters turn off exposure compensation settings selected using the amp button are not reset As above except that the exposure compensation On value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off Off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the default button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 341 Customize command dials gt Change main sub Off default On m P Sub command dial Sub command dial 2 3 5 Sub command dial Main command dial 2 2A Main command dial Sub command dial Sm N A 315 316 b5 Center Weighted Area When calculating exposure center Option weighted metering assigns the greatest 8 bp 8mm weight to a circle in the center of the frame 12 12 mm default The diameter of this cir
67. pg 147 Preset Manalhiinctccscecersstssciectsrsecstscsstarsesceter a pg 148 139 140 White Balance Options For natural coloration choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting The following options are available Color temp Option K Description White balance is adjusted automatically using color temperature measured by image AUTO Auto 3 500 sensor and 1 005 segment RGB default 8 000 sensor For best results use type G or D lens If optional flash unit is used white balance reflects conditions in effect when the flash goes off z Incandescent 3 000 Use under incandescent lighting xk Fluorescent Use under following seven light sources Sodium vapor lamps 2 700 Use under sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues Warm white Use under warm white fluorescent 3 000 3 fluorescent lights White fluorescent 3 700 Use under white fluorescent lights Use under cool white fluorescent Cool white fluorescent 4 200 lights Day white fluorescent 5 000 a daylight white fluorescent Daylight fluorescent 6 500 Use under daylight fluorescent lights R Use under high color temperature High temp mercury EO 7 200 light sources e g mercury vapor vapor lamps 3 Direct sunlight 5 200 Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight Color temp Option K Description 4 Flash 5 400 Use with optional fl
68. precautions when handling batteries for use in this product e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Use only CR1616 lithium batteries to replace the clock battery Using another type of battery could cause an explosion Dispose of used batteries as directed e Do not short or disassemble the battery Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged e Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat e Do not immerse in or expose to water e Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation xix A Observe proper precautions when handling the quick charger Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or ele
69. product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as occur when entering or leaving a heated building ona cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device ina carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs 403 Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD dis
70. the preferred choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched sRGB sRGB default Adobe Adobe RGB 1 Select Color space SHOOTING MENU cy PEG compression j r 7 i a Highlight Color space in the Wiebe ri shooting menu pg 290 and A R n eal A Color space a E press gt N Active Distting OFF El Vignette control ON BE 2 Selecta color space E Color space a Highlight the desired option eare M and press oa ig Adobe Adobe RGB 183 184 Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 compliant applications and printers that support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support Exif 2 21 and DCF
71. the viewfinder from interfering with exposure 213 214 M out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting pg 215 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card vV Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure and or flash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During Shooting During interval timer photography the icon in the top control panel will blink Immediately before the next shooting interval begins the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off To view curr
72. time Highlight one of the start time following Choose start time amp 00 0100 options and press gt i EL Now Shooting begins A Move OSet 13 36 about 3 s after settings are completed proceed to Step 4 e Start time Choose a start time see Step 3 M Before Shooting Choose single frame S continuous low speed Ct or continuous high speed CH release mode when using the interval timer Before beginning interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Remember that the camera will focus before each shot no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF Before choosing a starting time select World time in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date pg 40 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted be sure the battery is fully charged 211 212 3 Choose a start time Press lt or gt to highlight hours or minutes press A or to change The starting time is not displayed if Now is selected for Choose start time gt Interval timer shooting Start time T m E Or 05 0100 001 x 1 0001 Move Set 13 37 Choose an interval Press lt or gt to highlight hours minutes or seconds press A or W to change Note that the camera will not be
73. to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on the settings available in dynamic area AF see Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 307 For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 309 77 78 Focus Point Selection The camera offers a choice of 51 AF area mode selector focus points that together cover a wide area of the frame The focus point can be selected manually allowing photographs to be composed with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame single point and dynamic area AF or automatically auto area AF note that manual focus point detection is not available when auto area AF is selected To select the focus point manually 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point 2 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point At default settings the center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed Portrait Tall
74. to let the camera automatically select High Normal or Low according to shooting conditions M Active D Lighting When Active D Lighting is on the capacity of the memory buffer drops and additional time is required to record images pg 429 Matrix metering is recommended pg 110 Although exposure is in fact reduced to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows highlights underexposed areas and mid tones are automatically adjusted to prevent the resulting photograph from being underexposed The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings pg 167 can not be adjusted while Active D Lighting is in effect Noise distortion or banding may be visible at high ISO sensitivities In exposure mode M an Active D Lighting setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal M Active D Lighting versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera Option Description Choose for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than sRGB making it
75. to the built in speaker or microphone 11 1 Viewfinder ssssessssssessessesssssssssss 47 fet AE AF lock button ENE IE AETAT 80 81 340 3 AF ON AF ON button 75 94 4 Main command diial 00000 16 5 Multi selectOf sssssssssessesssssssssss 28 6 Focus selector l0CK uu 78 7 Memory card access lamp 43 56 8 Memory card slot cover 42 44 12 13 9 Card slot cover release button under COVEN essesssesssesssessesssesseesee 42 10 AF ON AF ON button for Vertical SHOOTING sses 313 11 amp microphone button 249 12 AF area mode selector 76 13 Main command dial for Vertical SHOOTING sscccseeeceeees 16 The Top Control Panel 11 z mero n ee ce cs bs Pt NN Ot AF 0h 5 a z REAR C REM FAAA 13 6 ABCD 471 47 a a a EEE I Mase vase came m vase ta 7 Eoso Ae AA a en E a T T 14 10 1 Shutter speed 116 120 Exposure compensation VANU E asssninsitisseninssscensdassassenseosenstes 128 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing SEqUEnNCe ssseesseereoroorsssssssessnsssse 131 Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence 135 Number of intervals for interval timer photography 214 Focal length NON CPU lenses wc 220 ISO sensitivity 0 eeeeeeeseeceneeeeee 104 2 Shutter speed lock icon 123 3 Flexible program indicator 115 4 Exposure MOE Q cssesssseesseeseees 112 5
76. was pointed up or down 351 orientation when photo was taken Can not delete photo Photo is protected remove protection 244 Message is displayed Staind that RS Select All for Playback folder 281 images are available for playback ae chanigeprint Memory card is full delete photos 49 Photo is in NEF RAW format Transfer Can not select photo for printing to computer and print using supplied 262 software or Capture NX 2 e Set USB to MTP PTP 352 e NEF RAW and TIFF photos can notbe 262 printed by direct USB connection Use Can not print photos DPOF print service TIFF images only or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX 2 Photo is not Choose correct video mode 348 displayed on TV Problem Solution Page Photo is not displayed on high _ Confirm that HDMI cable available d 276 definition video separately is connected device Cannot copy photos Choose correct USB option 257 to computer Photos not displayed in Capture NX 2 Update software to latest version 391 Can not use Camera Go trolPro 2 Set USB to MTP PTP 257 Computer displays Third party software does not display effects of Picture Controls active NEF RAW images aed differently from D Lighting or vignette control Use _ ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 camera available separately HE Miscellaneous Problem Solution Page Date of recording
77. when no operations are performed Choose from 10 s 20 s 1 minute 5 minutes or 10 minutes Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life Regardless of the setting chosen the monitor remains on if no operations are performed for about ten minutes when the camera is powered by an optional EH 6 AC adapter Option O2s 2s Obs 5s Oils 10 s default Oils 20s Option Dils 10s U 20 s default im 1min 5n 5min Dim 10 min 319 d Shooting Display d1 Beep Choose High or Low to sound a beep when the self timer is used or the camera focuses in single servo autofocus note that a beep will not sound if Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 306 Option Description Choose the pitch of the beep 7 1H High from High and Low A P_ ies F56 icon is displayed in the top AFS REM m sHoor fN control panel and shooting coon OG 2 716 information displays Off default Turn the beep speaker off L Low 320 d2 Shooting Speed Choose the maximum frame advance rate for CH continuous high speed and Ct continuous low speed modes Note that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds or when using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses Option Description In CH continuous high speed mode the frame advance rate for DX for
78. which pictures are recorded pg 70 Image Area Although the D3X can record photographs with the same diagonal picture angle as a 35mm format camera using a 3 2 aspect ratio it can also be used to record photographs with the smaller DX picture angle or the 5 4 aspect ratio pg 60 JPEG Compression Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a fixed size or to vary file size for improved image quality pg 68 NEF RAW Recording Choose compression and bit depth options for NEF RAW images pg 69 White Balance Adjust white balance settings pg 140 297 Set Picture Control Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to 298 instantly adjust image processing settings pg 162 Manage Picture Control Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations or copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card pg 170 Color Space Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces pg 183 Active D Lighting This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows pg 181 The default setting is Off Vignette Control Vignetting is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G and D lenses DX and PC lenses excluded Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture Choose from High Normal the default setting Low and Off Vignette Control Depending on the scene
79. x 10 1 Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Print size decreases as printer resolution increases NEF RAW Images Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images When opened in software such as ViewNX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately NEF RAW images have the dimensions given for large L size images in the table above 70 Image size can be set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired option is displayed in the rear control panel The Image Size Menu a ISO QUAL WB Co a A QUAL button Sub command dial Rear control panel Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the shooting menu pg 290 71 Slot 2 Use the Slot 2 option in the shooting menu pg 290 to choose the role played by the memory card in slot 2 Option Rear control panel Description The memory card in slot 2 is a Overflow onm used to record photographs Do default i HAH TA when the memory card in slot 1 is full sija om pE Each photograph is recorded O0 Backup ann pA to both memory cards At image quality settings of NEF RAW JPEG the NEF RAW image is recorded to wii RAW Slot 1 m nm E the memory card
80. zoom 36 x 24 3 2 format images in up to 27 x large images 20 x medium images or 13 x small images Release Q button to magnify selected area to fill monitor View other areas of image Use multi selector to view area not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Rotate main command dial to view same View other nave location in other images at current zoom images ratio Change F g See page 244 for more information protect status Return to Monitor will turn off Photographs can be shooting taken immediately mode Display See page 277 for more information menus 243 244 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame zoom and thumbnail playback the O n button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the t button or the Delete option in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted pp 45 347 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the On button The photograph will be marked with a amp icon To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted display the photograph or highlight it
81. 12 14 17 14 17 14 60 down 7 down 7 down a toward lens 90 up 90 up 20 ae A light axis Head rotation 180 left 180 left 180 left 90 up 45 up and right 90 right 20 right away from light axis white balance appropriately 2 Controlled remotely using optional SB 900 or SB 800 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 3 ISO 100 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position SB 900 with standard illumination 4 27mm zoom coverage 5 24mm zoom coverage HE SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander If a color filter is attached to the SB 900 when AUTO or flash is selected for white balance the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash 187 188 Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 The following features are available with the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU
82. 175 176 EE Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card 1 Select Copy to card T Manage Picture Control E Load save After displaying the Load save menu as described in pti Step 1 on page 174 highlight C Copy to card and press g a 2 Select a Picture Control E Manage Picture Control 10 Copy to card Highlight a custom Picture a a Control and press gt Any Picture Controls that may already have been saved to the selected slot will be overwritten Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user created custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card 3 Choose a destination Manage Picture Control 1 Choose destination 4101 STANDARD 02 Choose a destination from slots per ice NEUTRAL 02 4103 MONOCHROME 02 1 through 99 and press to a save the selected Picture B Control to the memory card C107 Unused Managing Custom Picture Controls Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls EE Renaming Custom Picture Controls 1 Select Rename In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Rename and press gt Manage Picture Control Le Save edit U Delete R Load save Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 a
83. 2 0 select the appropriate color space manually An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space allowing applications that support color management to automatically select the correct color space For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software The following Nikon software automatically selects the correct color space when opening photographs created with the D3X ViewNxX supplied and Capture NX 2 available separately Flash Photography Using Optional Flash Units This chapter describes how to use the camera with optional flash units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS pg 186 Compatible Flash Units scccscscsscesscersssersssereees pg 187 CLS Compatible Flash Units sssssssssssssssesessssessssseseseessssosesssseses pg 187 ORERE A I e recente tena pg 191 iM Flash Contro eee eaa Ea eaae ntt pg 193 FlashMode Seara E EEA anren pg 194 AA EOE e A E AAA E pg 198 Elash Contacts ereire Aa Rea aeaaee pg 201 185 186 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography The Creative Lighting System supports the following features e i TTL flash control Improved through the lens TTL flash control
84. 24 Information Display pg 14 The current image area selection can be viewed P by pressing the M button to display shooting information in the monitor F9 is displayed when FX format 36 x 24 is selected fi when DX il 3 ai format 24 x 16 is selected and Ea when 5 4 a 30 x 24 is selected i ETA M Auto DX Crop The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on The Fn Depth of Field Preview and AE L AF L Buttons Changes to image area settings can be made using the Fn button the default setting see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 333 the depth of field preview button Custom setting f5 Assign preview button pg 339 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 340 Note that some button press options can not be combined with options using dials Image Size Image size varies with the option selected for image area 65 Image Quality The camera supports the following image quality options Option Filetype Description Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic Format NEF Use with images that will be transferred to a computer for printing or NEF RAW NEF processing Note that once transferred toa computer NEF RAW images can only be viewed using compatible software such as ViewNxX supplied or Captur
85. 379 Remove items 378 N NEF 66 69 NEF RAW 66 69 NEF RAW recording 69 NEF RAW bit depth 69 12 bit 69 14 bit 69 Type 69 Compressed 69 Lossless compressed 69 Uncompressed 69 Nikon Transfer 256 259 No memory card 344 Non CPU lens data 218 0 Overview data 239 240 P PC 222 259 Photo info 229 Photo info playback 332 PictBridge 263 440 Picture angle 60 297 386 Picture Controls 162 Playback 57 225 274 folder 281 full frame 226 information 229 menu 278 slide show 288 thumbnail 241 331 Zoom 243 Playback folder 281 Print DPOF 268 Border 270 Page size 270 Start printing 270 Time stamp 270 Print options PictBridge Setup menu 266 Border 266 Cropping 267 No of copies 266 Page size 266 Start printing 267 Time stamp 266 Print select 268 Border 270 Page size 270 Start printing 270 Time stamp 270 Print set DPOF 272 Printing 262 Programmed auto 114 Protecting photographs 244 R Rear curtain sync 194 Red eye correction 367 Red eye reduction 194 Red eye reduction with slow sync 195 Release button to use dial 343 Release mode 85 continuous 86 88 high speed 86 88 low speed 86 88 live view 86 90 mirror up 86 102 self timer 86 100 single frame 86 Remote cord 392 Reset 204 293 304 422 Reset custom settings 304 Reset shooting menu 293 Reverse indicator
86. 4 6 Choose a selection method Highlight one of the following options and press gt ex Copy image s mj Select destination folder Select folder by number gt Select folder from list Option Description Enter number of destination Ppr folder pg 294 T Select folder by number Select folder A 010 by number 100 999 Move Set WOK Select destination folder from PREZO list W Select folder from list if TOONCD3X OW Select folder 101NCD3X A 102NCD3X from list 103NCD3X 7 Select a destination folder Enter the desired folder number or highlight the destination folder and press to select the folder and return to the Copy image s menu Select Copy image s Highlight Copy image s and press gt ma Cony image s Y iSelect image s 100 ca Select destination folder 101 F Copy image s 285 286 9 Select Yes ma Cory image s A confirmation dialog will be lt displayed Highlight Yes and p ans press i 7 Copy image s vV Copy Image s Images can only be copied if there is sufficient space on the destination memory card Hidden pictures can not be copied If the destination folder contains a file with the same name as a file selected for copying a warning will be Image with same file name already exists displayed To replace the existing file Replace existing image OW highlight Replace existing image or
87. 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 1 Select Start eG Highlight Start and press The message shown at right will be E Dust off ref photo displayed and rEF will appear in the viewfinder and top control panel To exit Take photo ofbrioht without acquiring image dust off data o Ee press MENU 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 353 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data ag sia and the message shown at right will be Satins aha ty sai displayed Choose another reference object and repeat the process from step 1 vV Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference
88. 74 Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control pg 164 363 Creating Retouched Copies 1 Select an item in the RETOUCH MENU e D Lighting a retouch menu 2 Redeye correction e Press A or W to highlight an J mi Filter effects 9 item P to select Depending OP 7 l on the option selected a menu x may be displayed highlight an option and press gt Monochrome FE Color balance dof Image overlay Side by side comparison o 2 Selecta picture E Blackandwhite a COLI O emm 100 4 100 5 100 6 QZoom WOK The pictures on the memory card will be displayed Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the MR button If two memory cards are inserted the stick slot can be selected by holding the H9 button and pressing A The menu shown at right will be displayed pg 228 highlight the desired slot and press Cancel 3 Display retouch options Press to display retouch options see the section for the selected option for details To exit without creating a retouched copy press MENU EOCancel m Wsave 364 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon G 100NCD3X DSC_0007 JPG 2008 10 15 01 15 12 20 m Retouching Copies Copies created with Trim can not be furth
89. 77 307 E Easy exposure compensation 315 Electronic analog exposure display 120 122 128 Ethernet 261 387 EV steps for exposure cntrl 314 EV steps for exposure comp 314 Exif version 2 21 440 Exposure 109 112 125 128 130 bracketing 130 lock 125 meters 50 318 mode 112 aperture priority auto 118 manual 120 programmed auto 114 shutter priority auto 116 Exposure bracketing 130 443 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Exposure compensation 128 Exposure delay mode 325 manual 74 83 92 Exposure preview 96 99 single servo AF 74 306 F point 51 78 311 contrast detect 90 95 97 tracking 75 77 309 3D 76 77 308 predictive 75 Focus point illumination 310 Focus point wrap around 311 Focus tracking with lock on 309 Focusing screen 388 396 type B clear matte VI 388 continuous servo AF 74 305 File information 230 File naming 296 File number sequence 322 Filter effects 370 Skylight 370 Warm filter 370 Fine tune optimal exposure 316 Firmware version 362 Flash 130 185 194 327 328 bracketing 130 328 control 193 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR 193 standard i TTL flash for digital SLR type E clear matte VI 388 Format 45 347 Format memory card 347 Front curtain sync 194 FV lock 198 333 193 G mode 194 GPS 221 modeling 327 GPS 221 229 238 monitor pre flash 186 conne
90. 78 Del E e E N 281 Playback Folder 281 Hide Image 281 Display Mode 282 Copy IMAGE S setsesssessscctvontsscssscesassanstsusscnsssssdestasesassstusdanessteasenes 283 Image Review essessssccsssrsecsesesssesessssensssasssscessssnessseessecssseseeses 287 After Delet sniisssssssesinsisssssrssscerissessinisossresisseassvirsstasiiseas 287 Rotate Tall Slide Show Print Set DPOF sssscssessassscessasecosesnasseanctsnseonstsasseacesnsesececosasacecnnss 289 i The Shooting Menu Shooting Options cscsssescsecesees 290 Shooting Menu Bank Reset Shooting Menu M Active FOLDED sccsscseisssssessoceasscecsusssacasncisanscosstecasennsvas esssuudeoonsoeaies Image Quality on eeecsseecssstscccssececsseccesueecssneccsnseessnsesesnseesssueeses Image Size Image Area Manage Picture Control Color Space sescsseccsseesseeess 7 Active D Lighting 0 2 secsssssscsssecsssssscsseessssseccsneeeeenseessseeeseaseets Vignette Control sessssssscsssssecssecsssssecssseeccesseccssesecsssecsesnecses Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction 300 High ISO INR issssscisscssesonsssssconassconsnstasscesinisconsounasesccdnnesneescuaserdnone 300 ISO Sensitivity Settings Live VIEW ceeesessssssecseesnseeees 301 Multiple Exposure 301 Interval Timer SHOOTING ssssssccssssccssescessescessecessntecesseesees 301 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings 302 Custom
91. 800 Flash unit Advanced Wireless Lighting Commander Remote SB 900 SB 900 SB 900 Flash mode feature SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 800 SU 800 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 TTL kenra vivlvilylyvlvliviv AA Auto aperture vt J RL ATW A Non TTL auto Ye Rr wr GN Range priority manual M Manual Y Yv vY Y Yv Y Yv RPT Repeating flash Yv vY Y Vv Y Auto FP High Speed Sync Y v vY Vv Y vV vY FV lock Viv iviv Vv Y v v AF assist for multi areaAF Y vY ow Vv Flash Color Information Communication v ig K REAR Rear curtain sync Y Y Y Y Y Vv Vv Vv Red eye reduction Vv Vv Vv Vv Auto zoom Vv Y i v Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units 2 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 4 Selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 5 Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 6 Selected with flash unit Select 1 250 s Auto FP for Custom Setting
92. Approximate time needed Calibration Charge lamps to recalibrate battery lamp 2h 4h 6h Over 6 hours O glows O glows O glows O glows 4 6 hours O glows O glows glows off 2 4 hours O glows O glows off off Under 2 hours O glows off off off When calibration is complete the calibration and charge lamps will turn off and charging will begin immediately Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement of battery charge state calibration need not be performed when the calibration lamp blinks Once begun calibration can be interrupted as desired e If the calibration button is not pressed while the calibration lamp is blinking normal charging will begin after about ten seconds To interrupt calibration press the calibration button again Calibration will end and charging will begin 437 438 vV Battery Warning If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when no battery is inserted there is a problem with the charger If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when a battery is inserted a problem has occurred with the battery or charger during charging Remove the battery unplug the charger and take the battery and charger to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Charging and Calibrating Two Batteries The MH 22 charges only one battery at a time If batteries are inserted in both chambe
93. B 2B 0 3A 2A 1A E E E EE T ip fe eeininiceet 7 1A 1B 1B 2B 3B 0 4A 3A 2A 1A Ler cee eerie EPEE PEE S GF peerantiweet 9 1A1B 18 2B 3B 4B See Also See page 145 for a definition of mired 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot lt W Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will have a different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining m me lata z fe iS the number of exposures remaining TA frame count and icon will flash in 5 i the top control panel a flashing lt BETE icon will appear in the viewfinder and the shutter release will be disabled Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted 137 138 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and are no longer displayed in the control panels The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 204 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated White Balance Bra
94. Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is attached Off Crop selected for Choose image area is used BE Choose Image Area Choose the image area used when Off is selected for Auto DX crop pg 63 Option Description Images are recorded in FX format using the full area of the image sensor 35 9 x 24 0 mm producing a picture angle equivalent to a Nikkor lens ona 35mm format camera The edges of pictures taken with DX format lenses will be blacked out An area at the center of the image sensor 23 6 x 15 7 mm is used to record pictures in DX DX format format To calculate the 24x16 approximate focal length of the lens in 35mm format multiply by 1 5 FX format E 36x24 Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 4 30 0 x 24 0 mm The edges of 5 4 pictures taken with DX format 30x24 lenses will be blacked out 61 DX Lenses DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a smaller picture angle than lenses for 35mm format cameras If Auto DX crop is off and FX format 36 x 24 or 5 4 30 x 24 is selected for Image area when a DX lens is attached the edges of the image may be eclipsed This may not be apparent in the viewfinder but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out a ieee DX format 24 x 16 i T image circle DX format 5 4 FX format i
95. Color space pg 183 sRGB Active D Lighting pg 181 Off Vignette control pg 299 Normal Long exp NR pg 300 Off High ISO NR pg 300 Normal ISO sensitivity settings pg 104 ISO sensitivity pg 104 100 ISO sensitivity auto control pg 106 Off Live view pg 90 Live view mode pg 91 Hand held Release mode pg 91 Single frame Multiple exposure pg 206 Reset Interval timer shooting pg 211 Reset 3 1 With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset 2 Applies to all banks Reset shooting menu can not be selected while LA shooting is in progress 3 Applies to all banks Shooting ends when reset is performed 423 424 EE Defaults Restored with Reset Custom Settings pg 304 Option Default a1 AF C priority selection pg 305 Release a2 AF S priority selection pg 306 Focus a3 Dynamic AF area pg 307 9 points a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 309 Normal a5 AF activation pg 309 Shutter AF ON Focus point illumination pg 310 26 Manual focus mode On Continuous mode On Focus point brightness Normal a7 Focus point wrap around pg 311 No wrap a8 AF point selection pg 311 51 points a9 AF ON button pg 312 AF ON a10 Vertical AF ON button pg
96. F Manage Picture Control Delete from card 1101 STANDARD 02 Highlight a custom Picture C 102 NEUTRAL 02 Control slot1 through 99 and O WONOCHROUES OZ wi either z e press to view current ED Grid a eCoi Picture Control settings or E WoNOCHROWE 02 o Sharpening Contrast Y Brightness Filter effects Toning rie Cyanotype 4 oO GQGrid Done e press to display E Manage Picture Control confirmation dialog shown at pedal rig ht Delete Picture Control MONOCHROME 02 Yes No 4 Select Yes gt Manage Picture Control Delete from card Highlight Yes and press to FG Delete Picture contro delete the selected Picture 3 MONOCHROME 02 Control Yes No 180 Active D Lighting Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day Active D Lighting Auto Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting High 181 182 To use Active D Lighting 1 Select Active D Lighting SHOOTING MENU cy PEG compression al 5 NEF RAW recordi In the shooting menu pg 290 s White balance highlight Active D Lighting AN a E Col and press P A er oF E Vignette control ON 2 Choose an option Highlight an option and press Choose Auto
97. HT ING WARM FILTER CYANOTYPE TRIM SPRING HAS COME SP RING HAS COME 3636 li 10 11 6 Vignette control eee 299 7 Retouch history 8 Image comment 9 Camera name 10 Image area 2 ssssssssssssssessssrssrrsssrsss 60 11 Folder number frame NUMDE 2 ssssssssssessssssssssrrrrrererrressss 293 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 282 2 Displayed in yellow if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 236 EE Shooting Data Page 4 1 Voice MEMO ICON sesse 248 2 Protect status oo eeeescseecceteeseee 244 3 Retouch indicator 363 4 Name of photographer 357 5 Copyright holdet s00 357 NIKON TARO NLKON 6 Camera name 7 Image area 8 Folder nu mber frame 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 282 and copyright information was appended to photograph pg 357 2 Displayed in yellow if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 237 EE GPS Data N 35 35 971 a 139 43 696 235m i ey AP PAULUS 01 15 00 1105 17 1 Voice MEMO ICON seesseesseeees 248 7 Coordinated Universal Time 244 UTC 363 8 Heading 9 Camera name 2 Protect status 3 Retouch indicator 4 Latitude 5 Longitude 10 Image area 3 eeecccssssessceesseesee
98. If an option other than Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Fluorescent is selected highlight a lighting type and press If Choose color temp is selected highlight a color temperature and press If Preset manual is selected choose a preset as described on page 157 before proceeding 143 2 Fine tune white balance E White balance Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M Coordinates Adjustment axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color temperature with each increment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Increase green Green G A G rs Blue B Coj Amber A Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue Increase amber 144 Press 6 Press to save settings and return to the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned on the A B axis a lt gt icon will be displayed in the rear control panel White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as amp incandescent is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually
99. Japanese NI Nederlands Dutch et ss Korean PI Polski Polish 349 Image Comment Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed in ViewNX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 391 The comment is also visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information display e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Input comment Input a comment as described on page 292 Comments can be up to 36 characters long e Attach comment Select this option to Image comment attach the comment to all subsequent z photographs Attach comment can be Y O turned on and off by highlighting it and R pressing gt 350 Auto Image Rotation Photographs taken while On the default option is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback pg 287 or when viewed in ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 391 The following orientations are recorded Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the pla
100. L button 340 3 Self timer delay 319 f7 Customize command dials 341 c4 Monitor off delay 319 f8 Release button to use dial 343 f9 No memory card 344 f10 Reverse indicators 345 303 304 Custom Setting Bank Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described on page 291 Custom Settings Bank The bank letter appears in the top control panel 25 TE and shooting information displays If settings in ra Fan the current bank have been modified from APS REM default values an asterisk will be displayed rou adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu R Reset Custom Settings Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings bank See page 424 for a list of default settings Custom Settings
101. Nikon DIGITAL CAMERA DaX User s Manual Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from Q The Q amp A Index pp iv ix Know what you want to do but don t know the function name Find it from the question and answer index The Table of Contents pp x xvii Find items by function or menu name The Quick Start Guide pp 23 24 A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right away The Index pp 442 448 Search by key word Error Messages pp 414 420 If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor find the solution here Troubleshooting pp 407 413 Camera behaving unexpectedly Find the solution here A For Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety pg xviii Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately 1 D3X digital camera pg 3 LI Body cap pp 4 391 LI BS 2 accessory shoe cover pg 3 C1 EN EL4a rechargeable Li ion battery with terminal cover pp 32 34 L MH 22 quick charger with power cable and two contact protectors pp 32 437 T UC E4 USB cable pp 256 264 C1 USB cable clip pg 259 1 EG D2 audio video cable pg 274 LI AN D3X stra
102. P high speed sync is used with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter speed is set to 1 250 s When the 1 250 s Auto FP camera shows a shutter speed of 250 s in exposure mode P or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 250 S 1 250 s default Flash sync speed set to 1 250 s 1 200 s Flash sync speed set to 1 200 s 1 160s Flash sync speed set to 160 s 1 125 s Flash sync speed set to 1 125 s 1 100 s Flash sync speed set to 1 100 s 1 80 s Flash sync speed set to 1 80 s 1 60 s Flash sync speed set to 1 60 s Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter priority auto or manual exposure modes select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel 326 e2 Flash Shutter Speed This option determines the slowest shutter speed available when using front or rear curtain sync or red eye reduction in programmed auto or aperture priority auto exposure modes regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in shutter priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s the default setting t
103. Replace all and press Hidden or protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced Select Skip to cancel replacement and proceed to copy remaining files Select Cancel to cancel before copying is complete Copies have the same protect marking as the original print marking is not copied Voice memos will be copied with their associated images Image Review Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting Option Description On Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting Off default Pictures can only be displayed by pressing P button After Delete Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description Chas Show next Display following picture If deleted picture was last default frame previous picture will be displayed Pa Show Display previous picture If deleted picture was first previous frame following picture will be displayed If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded following picture will be displayed as described for Show next If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as described for Show previous By Continueas before Rotate Tall Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures for display during playback Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriat
104. Retouch pg 363 Create a menu of custom options pg 376 If My Menu desired a menu of recently used settings can be displayed in place of My Menu pg 380 27 Using Camera Menus HE Menu Controls The multi selector and button are used to navigate the menus Move cursor Select up item Select highlighted Cancel and return highlighted item gt to previous menu lt or display sub rs menu button Nicie carsee Select highlighted down item BE Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu Press lt to highlight the icon for the current menu 28 a SHOOTING MENU Shooting menu bank Reset shooting menu Active folder File naming slot 2 TE Image quality Image size Image area 3 Select amenu Press A or to select the desired menu PLAYBACK MENU Delete Playback folder Hide image _ Display mode EA Copy image s Image review After delete Rotate tall 4 Position the cursor in the PLAYBACK MENU z selected menu S Playback folder Hide image Press gt to position the cursor A CEIT in the selected menu S ee 2 Rotate tall 5 Highlight a menu item PLAYBACK MENU i Delete Press A or W to highlight a 2 geen Si menu item E aey ae
105. SB CONNECCION eaae reena a EAA S EEES pg 258 Wireless and Ethernet Networks sssssssssssssssssssssseescsssessssseesee pg 261 Printing PhotographS seessssescossoscssoscsccscsscseseessosessos pg 262 Direct USB CONnMectiONs eee eenen aaea RERE pg 263 Viewing Photographs on TV sssssssessoscsscscseossssoseosossos pg 274 Standard Definition Devices s sssssssssesssesssssesesesesssssssseeseeseesss pg 274 High Definition Devices ssssssssessesssssssssssreeeessesssssesoeereeesssssss pg 276 255 Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer using the supplied UC E4 USB cable Once the camera is connected Nikon Transfer supplied or optional Nikon software such as Camera Control Pro 2 can be used to copy photographs to the computer or control the camera remotely vV Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 available separately pg 391 can be used to control the camera from a computer Before connecting the camera set the camera USB option pg 257 to MTP PTP When Camera Control Pro 2 is running F will be displayed in the top control panel 256 EH Before Connecting the Camera Install the necessary software from the supplied installer CD see the Install Guide for more information To en
106. Save Load Settings ssscsssessscessssecsscssssessecsssesssecssseesesessesecs 358 GPS L eeuoisd NRAN ANN 360 Virtual Horizon 360 Non CPU Lens Data 360 AF Fine Tune 361 Firmware Version ccsssssssssssssecsessssecsssessessseessssssesscsscassscsess 362 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies 363 D Lighting 0 sesecssstecccstscesssececssecesnsecccssecesneeeesaseeceaseeess Red Eye Correction Filter Effects cissie Color Balance i Image OVE AY eescccsssccssessccssecesssseccsseecenscessnseeccsneesssneensaneeseese Side by Side COMPALISON cssssssccsssscesssecessseeeseesesstecesneees 374 i My Menu Creating a Custom MANU ssessccssescesseeseesseeeees 376 Adding Options to My M Nnu ssssscsssssscssseccssesesneesssneeessnsees 376 Deleting Options from My Menu u sesssscsssssssessescsseeessneeees 378 Reordering Options in My Menu sssssssssscssecsssssecesseeseeneeeeee 379 Displaying Recent SettingS ssssccssseccsssescssecsssseccseesseneesse 380 Technical Notes 381 Compatible Lenses ou eeessesssssssssssessssecsseessscceseecsstecsneecsnsccsseeesnscessees Other ACCESSOSICS seecssescsssecsssscesccesseessseccsseecssccssucceseecesseesssessnseestecs Caring for the Camera ssssscsssssccsseccssssecessecssnseersnsecenneecsnseesaee SHOFAQC sssccessinstescesesnsonssssasssnasccdesnsnsecoienncnsevunestascansscbusnfnsbtossgeonsennanss Clea NiNeu iaaii
107. Setting Bank xiv B Reset Custom Settings ssssseesessessssssssecseececcceceesseseeseensees 304 HAULOLOCUS coe cAioses tas EEE EER 305 a1 AF C Priority Selection cssscssssssccseccsssssccsseessseeeenseees 305 a2 AF S Priority Selection 306 a3 Dynamic AF Area 307 a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On 309 a5 AF Activation sssesseeseeesseessssssssssssesuusuuseeseeceeccereereereeeeese 309 a6 Focus Point Illumination sssssssssssssssseessssseresssssereessssssees 310 a7 FOCUS Point Wrap Around sessscssseccssesecesseesssetecenseees 311 a8 AF Point Selection sssssssssssssssressssssreesssssereesssssneensssenees 311 a9 AF ON Button 312 a10 Vertical AF ON Button 313 Metering Exposure 04 314 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value ou essessssscccssecsssescccsseeceenee 314 b2 EV Steps for Exposure Ctrl cescsssescccsseccsseseccsseeeeeees 314 b3 EV Steps for Exposure COMP sssssscsessssecsseessseesseesseees 314 b4 Easy Exposure Compensation sesccsseecesseescesseeeeeees 315 b5 Center Weighted Area es b6 Fine Tune Optimal ExpOSure scccsscssssssseessssessesssees 316 CiTIMers AE LOCK iaren ann an 318 c1 Shutter Release Button AE L sssssssssssssssessssssssessssssressse 318 c2 Auto Meter off Delay s sssssssssssssrresssssseresssssereesssssnees 318 c3 Self Timer Delay c4 Monitor off Delay Shooting Displ
108. Shooting menu bank menu displays the list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1 1 Select a ban k E Shooting menu bank Highlight the desired bank and press gt 291 292 2 Entera name Keyboard area To move the cursor in the name EAO area press the E9 button and WRG ae as press lt or gt To enter a new a wwomeRstuvMxYZ I letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector erOCursor_Giinput_ COOK _ to highlight the desired Name area character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the f button To return to the shooting menu without changing the bank name press the MENU button Bank names can be up to twenty characters long Any characters after the twentieth will be deleted Save changes and exit After editing the name press to save changes and exit The Shooting menu bank menu will Shooting menu bank be displayed 1 Rename uy A SNAP gt Reset Shooting Menu Choose whether to restore default settings for the current shooting menu bank See page 423 for a list of default settings With the exceptions of image quality image size white balance and ISO sensitivity shooting menu settings are not reset when a two button reset pg 204 is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current shooting menu bank No default Exit without c
109. Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective pixels Effective pixels 24 5 million Image sensor Image sensor 35 9 x 24 0 mm CMOS sensor Nikon FX format Total pixels 25 72 million Dust reduction System Image Dust Off reference data optional Capture NX 2 software required Storage Image size pixels FX format 36 x 24 image area 6 048 x 4 032 L 4 544 x 3 024 M 3 024 x 2 016 S e DX format 24 x 16 image area 3 968 x 2 640 L 2 976 x 1 976 M 1 984 x 1 320 S e 5 4 30 x 24 image area 5 056 x 4 032 L 3 792 x 3 024 M 2 528 x 2 016 S File format e NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed compressed or uncompressed e TIFF RGB e JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression available e NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome storage for up to nine custom Picture Controls Media Type and Il CompactFlash memory cards UDMA K compliant microdrives 431 432 Storage Double slot Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage of NEF RAW and JPEG images File system DCF Design Rule for Came
110. a are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out After changing the zoom position select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture BE The Non CPU Lens Data Menu 1 Select Non CPU lens data Highlight Non CPU lens data in the setup menu pg 346 and press gt oa SETUP MENU e Image authentication OFF J Copyright information OFF Y Save load settings EE z GPS EA Virtual horizon a LSI Non CPU lens data No 1 AF fine tune z El Firmware version Select a lens number Highlight Lens number and press lt or gt to choose a lens number between 1 and 9 Non CPU lens data Done Lens number gt E Focal length mm Ea Maximum aperture Ea Move Bet Select a focal length Highlight Focal length mm and press lt or P gt to choose a focal length between 6 and 4 000 mm Non CPU lens data Done Lens number EE g Focal length mm rE 55 A Maximum aperture fal Move Set Select amaximum aperture Highlight Maximum aperture and press lt or P to choose a maximum aperture between Non CPU lens data Done Lens number E Focal length mm 55 Maximum aperture SB F281 Move Set f 1 2 and f 22 The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens 219 5 Select Done py Non CPU lens data ar Highlight Done and press Dor The specified focal leng
111. able to take photographs gt Interval timer shooting A Cnterval K i w m Or 10 05 01 00 001 x 1 0001 E GMove OSet at the specified interval if it is shorter than the shutter speed or the time required to record images Choose the number of intervals and number of shots per interval Press lt or gt to highlight number of intervals or number of shots press A or to change The total number of shots that will be taken is displayed to the right Interval timer shooting BSelect intvisX lt no of shots E4 QORxA 0006 gt z 2 Number of Number Total intervals of shots number of interval shots 6 Start shooting gt Interval timer shooting Highlight Start gt On and press to return to the shooting menu without starting the interval timer highlight Start gt Off and press The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken A message will be displayed in the monitor one minute before each series of shots is taken If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed of tir bt is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor The Viewfinder Eyepiece In exposure modes other than manual close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via
112. ace 2 Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Ly Release mode dial 3 Adjust Live view options in the shooting menu Select Live view inthe shooting menu emmm and choose Tripod for Live view oe mode Release mode options can be F selected as described on page 91 Dc a Handheld 4 Framea picture in the AF ON viewfinder button Frame a picture in the viewfinder and select a focus point using the multi selector then press an AF ON button The camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the camera can NOT be focused by pressing the shutter release button halfway 5 Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU e P g 6 Focus Autofocus focus mode S or In tripod mode the focus point for contrast detect autofocus can be moved to any point in the frame using the multi selector Contrast detect AF point To focus using contrast detect AF ON button autofocus press an AF 0N button The z focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten while the camera focuse
113. ada CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries e This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste e For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries e All batteries whether marked with this symbol or not are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste e For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Notices for Customers in the U S A The Battery Charger INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS For connection to a supply not in the U S A use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed This power unit is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
114. ady the Camera ne sssssscsssscsssesssssseccsntesscssecessseesssueceesusecssneesssneeees FOCUS ANG SHOO tis ssssssscsccsscssscssassisssitessvotsaseiuatsnestsccinsseasvavassancsassanss 55 Viewing Photographs sssccsssscsssessccsecsssseccsseecssnsecssneeeesneseenee 57 Deleting Unwanted Photographs sccssssccssseccssesesneesssnees 58 Image Recording Options 59 mage Aes ac5sc2ss53s 50 secets Sozeesu testes iavtbsvbasacosvesassescesesddensdvesverdesesucaascsssry 60 Image QUA NITY csssssecostssscasivcensivsssnvicdsausvseass sedans caatsveeauvevdaaytianveetaayt es 66 WIV AGS SIZO E E 70 SOE EEE E E svasecsstanc ovssadasedes svies E 72 Focus 73 Focus ModE isunen inkai au i 74 AF Area MOE ccssssssssecssscccssessseccssecessecssscesssecssseesasecesscessecesaeecsneeesnsees 76 FOCUS Point Selection eesssescsseccssccssscesesccsseesssecssseceaceessteceseesneeste 78 FOCUS LOCK cssssssessssesssssccssecsssecsnscessscesssecesscessecessccesueecsncessneceseessnseessecs 80 Manual FOCUS scssscscsas cccacsesssteszcsessidesit insstendesbiactssnacacstencanndscennbaacanntitaats 83 Release Mode 85 Choosing a Release Mode ssssssssscsssssesssesccesecessnscecssecesnnecesssees 86 CONTINUOUS MOE ceessessccsssssssscessecesscssscccssccsseesasecsssccesceesaeeceaeeesasees 88 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View ssssesssseesseeesees 90 Self Timer MOCe csssscsssscsssecsssccssseessecssseecescessseessseessneceseecsatecsseees
115. ai Replacing the FOCUSING SCION ssssscssssescsssecesseseccsseesesseeeeee Replacing the Clock Battery cscssssssscssessssseesssseccsseesesneesse The LOW PaSS Filter sessscsssscsssessccssscecssseccsssecsssseecensecsssneeccasees Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Troubleshooting esscsessecssesecesseecessseecsssescessescessscecussescesseescuneesenssecs Error Messages asecssciceccsisesssdincisessutneibesooriucsoudsncesniectutsnsiesisasesctaceusisees Appendix xvii For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product xviii BE WARNINGS A Keep the sun out of the frame A Turn off immediately in the event of Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment
116. al timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu e Performing a two button reset pg 204 e Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu pg 293 e Changing bracketing settings pg 130 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends BE No Photograph Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph is yet to be taken the memory buffer or memory card is full or the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF note that the camera focuses again before each shot Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In Cx continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at a rate of five shots per second or if DX format 24 x 16 is selected for Image area at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 Shooting speed pg 321 gt Continuous high speed In S single frame and C continuous low speed photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2 Shooting speed pg 321 gt Continuous low speed Using the Monitor Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval Shooting Menu Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks pg 291 If shoo
117. amber cover for D2 series cameras can not be used 4 insert the battery Insert the battery as shown at right 5 Latch the cover To prevent the battery from becoming dislodged during operation rotate the latch to the closed position and fold it down as shown at right Be sure the cover is securely latched EN EL4a Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL4a shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels pg 48 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged pg 355 The battery can be recalibrated as necessary to ensure that battery level continues to be reported accurately pg 437 35 36 M The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii xx and 403 406 of this manual To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F Charge indoors at ambient temperatures in the vicinity of 5 35 C 41 95 F for best results charge the battery at temperatures above 20 C 68 F Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperatur
118. amera supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 21 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection the camera uses a type A connector Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with a fully charged EN EL4a battery 2 500 mAh varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used Sample figures are given below e CIPA standard Approximately 4 400 shots Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s Live view not used e Nikon standard Approximately 5 300 shots Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8 ED lens under the following test conditions image quality set to JPEG normal image size set to L large shutter speed 1 250 s
119. an optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord pg 222 BE The GP 1 GPS Unit The GP 1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nikon digital cameras For information on connecting the unit see the manual provided with the GP 1 221 222 EE Other GPS Units Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2 01 or 3 01 of the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format can be connected to the camera s ten pin remote terminal using an MC 35 GPS adapter cord available separately pg 393 Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector These devices connect to the MC 35 using a cable with a D sub 9 pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device See the MC 35 instruction manual for details Before turning the camera on set the GPS device to NMEA mode 4800 baud BE The GS Icon When the camera establishes communication with a GPS device a BB icon will be displayed in the top control panel Photo information for pictures taken while the icon is displayed will include a page of GPS data pg 238 including the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading if supported If no data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds the icon will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS information GPS Data GPS data are only record
120. and dial Rear control panel wel d 0 3 Select direct measurement mode Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon starts to flash A flashing will also appear in the top control panel and i EEUNA viewfinder At default settings the m NORM displays will flash for about six a seconds Rear control panel iy P i25 56 igo PrE LIN Viewfinder 4 Measure white balance Before the indicators stop flashing frame the J reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d 0 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus 151 5 Check the results 152 If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panels while the viewfinder will show a flashing Ga At default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing na id will appear in the control panels and viewfinder at default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds Press the shutter release button halfway to return to Step 4 and measure white balance again Top control panel Villy haa d
121. and flash level Custom Setting e4 set to AE amp flash Camera varies aperture Custom Setting e4 set to 7 9 T AE only or aperture and flash level Custom P Setting e4 set to AE amp flash 4 Flash only Camera varies flash level only Custom Setting e4 set to AE amp flash Flash bracketing is performed only with i TTL or AA flash control If a setting other than Flash only is selected and a flash is not used ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot regardless of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control pg 106 329 e6 Bracketing Order At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN bracketing is performed in the order described on pages 132 and 136 If Under gt MTR gt over gt is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value 330 f Controls f1 Multi Selector Center Button This option determines what operations can be performed by pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting live view and playback modes BE Shooting Mode Selecting Shooting mode displays the following options Option Description Select center RESET focus point default Pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting mode selects the center focus point Pressing the center of the multi selector has no Not used Pa effect when the camera is in shooting mode BE Playback Mode Selecting P
122. ar control panel Choosing a Color Temperature When I Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The color temperature is displayed in the rear control panel q e o e o e ISO QUAL WB mc TEPINA WB button Sub command dial Rear control panel M Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or gt Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu Note that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub command dial replaces the value selected in the white balance menu 147 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera pg 150 Direct measurement Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory photograph card pg 155 148 The
123. ash units Cloudy 6 000 Use in daylight under overcast skies f Shade 8 000 Use in daylight with subjects in the shade 2 500 Choose color temperature from list of 10 000 values pg 147 Use subject light source or existing PRE Preset manual photograph as reference for white balance pg 148 All values are approximate Fine tuning set to 0 Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources If the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance I Choose color temp White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the rear control panel q e o er O ISO QUAL WB mc CO HAS WB button Main command dial al_lF_ Rear control panel The White Balance Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in the shooting menu pg 290 a Fluorescent Selecting fluorescent with the WB button and main command dial selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white balance menu pg 290 141 142 Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Choose a color temperature use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to a
124. automatically for 140 balance Auto natural colors under most types of lighting P Camera automatically adjusts shutter Exposure Programmed speed and aperture for optimal exposure 112 mode auto in most situations Center focus Focus point 78 point single point AF Focus point Viewfinder focus point display is shown above Camera focuses on subject in center focus point when shutter release button is pressed halfway 51 52 2 Choose exposure mode F Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to select exposure mode P The camera will automatically adjust shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations MODE button Main command dial 3 Choose single frame release mode Hold the release mode dial lock release down and turn the release mode dial to S single frame At this setting the camera will take one photograph each time the shutter release button is pressed Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial 4 Choose single point AF Rotate the AF area mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to single point AF At this setting the user can choose the focus point AF area mode selector 5 Choose single servo Focus mode autofocus selector Rotate the focus mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to S single servo autofocus At t
125. ay TS BER EE AEE OA E TA 2 SHOOTING Speed ansni nanei d3 Max Continuous Release ssssccssseccesseeccsseceenseeceeneees 321 d4 File Number SequUenCe ssssssssssssssoessscssesssssssssrorrseeee 322 d5 Control Panel Viewfinder 323 d6 Shooting Info Display 324 d7 LCD Illumination 325 d8 Exposure Delay MOde ssssscsssescsssssccsseeesseecesnseeesneeees 325 Bracketing Flash uu sessssssssessecsssescsecsssessccssneessccssseesssssseeeeeessse 326 e1 Flash Sync Speed ssssssscssssesccssecccsseccesneecessecessnscceeneeeseasees 326 e2 Flash Shutter Speed ss ssssssssssssssssoeeeeossssssssssssseooresees 327 e3 Modeling Flash a e4 Auto Bracketing Set ssecssssscccsseccsssssccssesessseecssneeessneeees 328 e5 Auto Bracketing Mode M sssscsssssccssessccseesssetecesneees 329 XV xvi e6 Bracketing Order seessssssecsssessssnteccsssecccsseceesseecssseeessnseees 330 f Controls seesecessesceseeees 331 f1 Multi Selector Center Button 331 f2 Multi SelectOr ss ssssssssssessssesesseeseeessseseeesssoeeessssssereessserree 332 f3 Photo Info PlaybaCkK sssssssssessssssssseesssseesseeessssessseeessseesssse 332 f4 Assign FUNC BUttON ssssssssssssessesssseseesssssoeresssssereesssssrre 333 f5 Assign Preview Button ssssssssscsssesccsecsssesecesseeseneteceee 339 f6 Assign AE L AF L BUttonn sssssssssssssssesssseesssessssseesseressseesssse 340
126. ay two photos to make a single Image overlay 371 image BE Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices Question Key phrase See page Can view my photos on TV Television playback 274 Can view my photos in High Definition HDMI 276 Connecting toa 2 How do copy photos to my computer computer 256 How do I print photographs Printing photographs 262 Can print photos without a computer Printing via USB 263 Can print the date on my photographs Time stamp 266 270 How do I order professional prints Print set DPOF 272 EE Optional Accessories Question Key phrase See page What optional flash units Speedlights Optional flash units 187 can use What lenses can I use Compatible lenses 382 What AC adapters remote cords and viewfinder accessories are available for Other accessories 387 my camera What memory cards can use Approved memory 394 cards What software is available for my Other accessories 391 camera Table of Contents OBA INDEX insni airsan iaiia saiia iv FOR YOUN Saey oonan xviii Notices i Introduction 1 OVENI OW siscsscdsdsscebscsscsuies seusesuctessacesacdastsdtaacsacdeaba stesdsa dstanesaasagcisbenecunasaces 2 Getting to Know the CaMesra csscssssssccssessccsesecseseecsnscsceseeseeseeesnees 3 Camera BOY eecsssssccsssssssscsssecsssseccsnscessneessusecssnsesesnseeseeneesssneeeesaee 3 The Top Control Panel
127. battery chamber Slide the clock battery chamber cover toward the front of the main battery chamber 3 Remove the clock battery 4 insert the replacement battery Insert a new CR1616 lithium battery so that the positive side the side marked with and the battery name is visible 5 Close the clock battery chamber Slide the clock battery chamber cover towards the back of the main battery chamber until it clicks into place 6 Replace the main battery Reinsert the EN EL4a 7 Set the camera clock Set the camera to the current date and time pg 40 Until the date and time have been set the icon will flash in the top control panel Z caAUTION E World time e Time zone Date and time Date format A Daylight saving time EA London Casablanca fe uTc 0 01 01 2008 00 00 45 Use only CR1616 lithium batteries Using another type of battery could cause an explosion Dispose of used batteries as directed vV Inserting the Clock Battery Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation Inserting the battery incorrectly could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could damage the camera 399 400 The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter as descr
128. camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d 0 through d 4 A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset pg 159 d 0 Stores last value measured for white By White balance balance pg 150 This preset is overwritten when a new value is measured d 1 d 4 Store values copied from d 0 pg 154 PRE Select W Set Store values copied from images on memory card pg 155 Y 100 3 100 io 100 4 100 5 100 6 PRE Set QZoom elect Set White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks pg 291 A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank no warning is displayed for preset d 0 149 BE Measuring a Value for White Balance 150 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in exposure mode adjust exposure so that the electronic analog exposure displays shows 0 pg 122 2 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the rear control panel of ae ISO QUAL WB mc CSG WB button Main comm
129. can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens Check exposure in the electronic analog exposure displays see page 122 and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is achieved Sub command dial Setting aperture ar ee Gaon A ot Setting shutter speed Main command dial Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected setting see pages 123 124 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Shutter speed 1 250 s Aperture f 8 AF Micro Nikkor Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture 121 122 Electronic Analog Exposure Displays The electronic analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and top control panel show whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 314 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the displays will flash Custom Setting b2 set to 1 3 step Optimal exposure Underexposed by 3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV Control panel fe aa actos cares Guasa mad r i tesiei Hairini EE Viewfinder a H
130. ce between main subject and ambient background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see pg 218 Not available when spot metering is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level brightness of background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 193 Flash Modes The camera supports the following flash modes Flash mode Description t Front curtain This mode is recommended for most situations In programmed auto and aperture priority auto modes shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1 250 and 1 60 s s 000 to 1 60 s with Auto FP sync High Speed Sync Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30s to capture both subject and background at night or under YLW dim light This mode is only available in exposure modes Slow sync P and A Tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake In exposure modes and M flash fires just before the 5 shutter closes Use to create effect of a stream of light REAR behind mov
131. cent photograph will be displayed in the monitor 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or P LA i 100NCD3X DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2008 10 15 00 6048x4032 To view additional information TT NIKON 03X on the current photograph Pme press A and W pg 229 ASD been i P 1 125 F5 6 100 85mm MBAUTO 0 O AdobeRGB FSD ff 100NCD3X DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2008 10 15 00 16048x4032 The card containing the current photograph is indicated by an icon as shown at right To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 287 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s the default setting after shooting 57 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described in Viewing Photographs on the previous page The card containing the current photograph is indicated by an icon as shown at right i Hee DSC_0001 IPG 2008 10 75 00 rra60dss 4032 2 Delete the photograph Press the t button A confirmation dialog will be displayed T button Delete cy 1 9 33
132. city to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once amonth Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Dry the accessory shoe cover If the camera is used in the rain water may penetrate the supplied BS 2 accessory shoe cover Remove and dry the accessory shoe cover after using the camera in the rain Notes on the monitor The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction Images recorded with the product are unaffected Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed b
133. cketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display pg 144 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis In self timer mode pg 100 the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded White Balance Keeping Colors True The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade direct sunlight or under incandescent lighting Unlike the film used in film cameras digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images according to the color of the light source This is known as white balance This chapter covers white balance settings White Balance OptionS sessssssesessssscosososescosososesessoso pg 140 Fine Tuning White Balance cccssscsssssesscscseees pg 143 Choosing a Color Temperature csceccssccecssecseees
134. ckground into focus Large apertures low f numbers soften background details in portraits or other compositions that emphasize the main subject Small aperture f 36 Large aperture f 2 8 Aperture can be locked at the selected setting see page 124 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Non CPU Lenses If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu pg 218 when a non CPU lens is attached the current f number will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel rounded to the nearest full stop Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops 4F with maximum aperture displayed as AFG and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring 119 120 M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in manual exposure mode 1 Select exposure MODE button mode M Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until M is displayed in the viewfinder and top Main onimanid dial control panel Choose aperture and shutter speed Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set to x 250 the flash sync speed limit or to values between 30 s and g 000 s or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure tus ty Pg 122 Aperture
135. cle can be setto 915 615mm 8 12 15 or 20 mm or to the average of the 20 620mm entire frame Avg Average Note that unless Average is selected the diameter is fixed at 12 mm when a non CPU lens is used regardless of the setting selected for Non CPU lens data in the setup menu pg 218 When Average is selected the average of the entire frame will be used for both CPU and non CPU lenses b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure Use this option to fine tune the exposure value selected by the camera Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of EV 1 Select Custom Setting b6 I b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Highlight Custom Setting b6 Eere competion icon Fine tune optimal exposure etait abe oti and press gt 2 Select Yes E b6 Fine tune optimal exposure The message shown at right T Pposure compensation ian will be displayed highlight i detaultvae Continue Yes and press to proceed n or select No to exit without No altering exposure 3 Select a metering method b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Highlight Matrix metering Center weighted or Spot A PR 0 T Spot metering 0 metering and press gt 4 Choose an exposure value gt b6 Fine tune optimal exposure a Matrix metering Press A or W to choose an exposure value from 1 to 1 EV Press to save changes z and exit vV Fine Tuning Expos
136. confirmation dialog shown at right Pamm will be displayed aaj Co 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options 3 Adjust printing options n Stw Choose page size border and time a OK stamp options as described on page 270 35x5in a warning will be displayed if the ee 5 selected page size is too small 4 start printing Highlight Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before printing is complete press 271 BE Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The Print set DPOF option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF Selecting Print set DPOF from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1 1 Choose Select set ia Print set DPOF Highlight Select set and press gt ML Select set A ic E Deselect all 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture in full screen press Q button To select the Om button current picture for printing ma Print set DPOF press the Om button and press Res ne A The picture will be marked t Fiu Kom RA with a amp icon and the number T Ee of prints will be set to 1 ax Es ure Keeping the Om button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the nu
137. ct from FX DX and 5 4 image areas toggle between FX and DX image areas select shutter speed and aperture in steps of 1 EV choose pre specified lens data for non CPU lenses select the focus point choose a shooting menu bank or select the number of focus points for dynamic area AF The Depth of Field Preview and AE L AF L Buttons Depending on the options selected for Custom Settings f5 Assign preview button pg 339 and f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 340 the depth of field preview and AE L AF L buttons can be used with the command dials to perform the same functions as the Fn button 21 22 The BS 2 Accessory Shoe Cover The supplied BS 2 accessory shoe cover can be used to protect the accessory shoe or to prevent light reflected from the metal parts of the shoe from appearing in photographs The BS 2 attaches to the camera accessory shoe as shown at right To remove the accessory shoe cover hold it down with your thumb and slide it off as shown at right while keeping a firm grip on the camera Quick Start Guide Follow these steps for a quick start with the D3X 1 Charge the battery pg 32 2 Insert the battery pg 34 3 Attach a lens pg 37 5 Turn the camera on pg 48 For information on choosing a language and setting the time and date see page 39 See page 47 for information on adjusting viewfinder
138. ct an existing Nikon Picture Control e Modify existing Picture Controls pg 166 Modify an existing Picture Control to create a combination of sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue for a particular scene or effect e Create custom Picture Controls pg 170 Store modified Picture Controls under unique names and recall or edit them as desired e Share custom Picture Controls pg 174 Custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be saved to the memory card for use in ViewNX supplied and other compatible software or software created custom Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera e Manage custom Picture Controls pg 177 Rename or delete custom Picture Controls Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls In addition to the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon websites Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Nikon Picture Controls Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among compatible devices and software 163 Selecting Nikon Picture Controls The camera offers four preset Nikon Picture Controls Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene Option Description Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations Minimal processing for
139. cted for Slot 2 pg 72 when two memory cards are inserted the card in slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is full The card currently in use is indicated in the top control panel aze REM E 1 Em ON 75 3 Insert the memory card Access lamp Insert the first memory card in slot 1 Slot 2 should be used only if a card is already inserted in slot 1 Insert the memory card with the rear label toward the monitor D When the memory card is fully inserted the eject button will pop up and the green access lamp Rear label will light briefly vV Inserting Memory Cards Insert the memory card terminals first Direction of Inserting the card upside down or backwards insertion could damage the camera or the card Check T to be sure that the card is in the correct p Oy erminals tl orientation Rear label 4 Close the card slot cover 43 EE Removing Memory Cards 1 Turn the camera off Confirm that the access lamp is off and turn the camera off 2 Remove the memory card Open the memory card slot cover O and press the eject button to partially eject the card The memory card can then be removed by hand Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card m Memory Cards Memory cards may be hot afte
140. cting 222 range 197 data 229 238 ready indicator 191 199 unit 221 393 sync speed 326 GPS data 238 sync terminal 201 H Flash shutter speed 327 HDMI 348 Flash sync speed 326 HDMI 276 348 440 flexible 115 Help 31 Fn button 64 198 333 Hi 105 f number 38 112 Focal length 218 Focal plane mark 84 Focus 74 autofocus 74 76 78 80 82 contrast detect 90 95 97 phase detection 90 electronic rangefinder 84 382 indicator 55 74 84 305 306 lock 80 82 312 mode 74 305 306 Hide image 281 High definition 274 276 348 440 High ISO NR 300 Highlights 231 232 282 Histogram 232 282 l Image area 60 63 5 4 30x24 61 Auto DX crop 60 63 Choose image area 61 63 DX format 24x16 61 FX format 36x24 61 Image area 38 60 70 297 Image authentication 356 Image comment 350 Image Dust Off 353 Image overlay 371 Image quality 66 Image quality 66 Image review 287 Image size 70 Image size 70 Index print 271 In focus indicator 55 74 84 305 306 Information 14 229 324 Interval timer shooting 211 Interval timer shooting 211 ISO sensitivity 104 ISO sensitivity auto control 106 Maximum sensitivity 106 Minimum shutter speed 106 ISO sensitivity settings 105 ISO sensitivity 103 ISO sensitivity step value 314 i TTL 186 193 J JPEG 66 68 72 JPEG compression 68 Optimal quality 68 Size priority 68 L
141. cting this option displays EEE menu shown at right select Auto maximum recording time t from 5 default 10 20 30 45 PERLE On or 60 s Unless On is bi ican Wils 60s 5s Auto and selected for Image review in manual playback menu pg 287 recording will begin when shutter release button is released after shooting Recording ends when amp button is pressed or after specified recording time has ended He Manual Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph only by pressing and holding button pg 250 248 HE Voice Memo Overwrite This option controls whether the voice a Voice memo overwrite memo for the most recent photograph can be overwritten in shooting mode The t following options are available E Enable Option Description Voice memo can not be recorded in shooting mode if one already exists for most recent image Voice memo can be recorded in shooting mode even if one already Enable exists for most recent image pg 250 Existing memo will be deleted and replaced by new memo Disable default BE Voice Memo Button This option controls manual recording The Pemma following options are available Option Description 2 ee Pressand Voice memo is recorded while Dmna V hold button is held down Recording default will end automatically after 60 s Recording begins when Pressto button is pressed and ends start when button is pres
142. ctric shock Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC to AC inverters Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire A A Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations CD ROMs CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment Observe caution when using a flash Using optional flash units in close contact with the skin or other
143. default Pressing the AF 0N button initiates autofocus i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the AF 0N button is pressed fia AE lock only Exposure locks while the AF ON button is pressed Exposure locks when the AF ON button is pressed and AE lock s remains locked until the button is pressed a second me Reset on time the shutter is released or the exposure meters release turn off Exposure locks when the AF ON button is pressed and a AE lock AER Hold remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fia AF lock only Focus locks while the AF ON button is pressed a10 Vertical AF Choose the function assigned to the AF ON button for vertical shooting g ON Button o Daz oP Sie Option Description Same as AF ON Both AF ON buttons perform the function selected for Custom Setting a9 AF ON Pressing the vertical AF ON button initiates AF ON default autofocus i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the vertical AF ON button is pressed fa AE lock only Exposure locks while the vertical AF ON button is pressed AE lock Reset on release me Exposure locks when the vertical AF ON button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off mS AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the vertical AF ON button is pressed
144. definition device choose the HDMI format from the options below Option Description AUTO Auto default The camera automatically selects the appropriate format 480P 480p progressive 640 x 480 progressive format 576p 576p progressive 720 x 576 progressive format 720P 720p progressive 1 280 x 720 progressive format 1080i 1080i interlaced 1 920 x 1 080 interlaced format The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected World Time Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone Date and time Set the camera clock pg 40 Choose the order in which the day month and year are displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Time zone Date format Daylight saving time Language Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available De Deutsch _ German Pt Portugu s Portuguese En English English Ru Pycckn Russian Es Espanol Spanish Sv Svenska Swedish Fi Suomi Finnish chy S288 _ Traditional Chinese Fr Fran ais French i ha Simplified Chinese lIt Italiano Italian A AA
145. dial to switch Change crop 5 between aspect ratios of 3 2 4 3 and aspect ratio A 5 4 Move crop Use multi selector to move crop to other area of image Preview crop Press center of multi selector to preview cropped image Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality pg 66 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio Aspect ratio Possible sizes ae 4 864 x 3 240 3 424 x 2 280 2 560 x 1 704 1 920 x 1 280 1 280 x 856 960 x 640 640 x 424 ae 4 864 x 3 648 3 424 x 2 568 2 560 x 1 920 1 920 x 1 440 1 280 x 960 960 x 720 640 x 480 oun 4 560 x 3 648 3 216 x 2 568 2 400 x 1 920 1 808 x 1 440 1 200 x 960 896 x 720 608 x 480 Monochrome Copy photographs in Black and white E Monochrome Sepia or Cyanotype blue and white c monochrome Y TA Sepia E Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype Increase displays a preview of the selected saturation image press to increase color K 4 gt saturation W to decrease Press fa O D g to create a monochrome copy es CENDCancel Decrease Darker lighter WSave saturation 369 Filter Effects Choose from the following color filter effects After adjusting fil
146. djust white balance Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg 328 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance See page 130 for more information Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial HE The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance E White balance option Select White balance in the Sar Ba shooting menu pg 290 then OP BR highlight a white balance z as option and press
147. e o 18Sa O t Edit the comment as described on page PRESITAN 292 MNOPQRSTUVWXYZI Cursor lnput OROK j 159 160 Image Enhancement This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue using Picture Controls how to preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D lighting and how to choose a color space Pict re Controls lt c s cccccscccecsssucesusstcsesstsesesecsssccseevessesss Creating Custom Picture Controls Active D Lighting eteten erete rattaat re tarea rents Eol CN o F 1E A E L A A 161 162 Picture Controls Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings among compatible devices and software Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings or make independent adjustments to sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be recalled or edited at will Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory card for use in compatible software and software created Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system BE Using Picture Controls Picture Controls can be used as described below e Select Nikon Picture Controls pg 164 Sele
148. e Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money coins securities government bonds or local government bonds even if such copies or reproductions are stamped Sample The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained the copying or reproduction or unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited e Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private groups ID cards and tickets such as passes and meal coupons e Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps drawings movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal c
149. e Mode Single Frame Continuous Live View Self Timer or Mirror Up Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs one at a time in a continuous sequence with the view through the lens displayed in the monitor with a timed shutter release delay fa or with the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration Choosing a Release MOd cscscecscscscscscscssssceccenes pg 86 Continuous Modenie eena eese eener pg 88 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View pg 90 Self Timer Mode facscscssessccectcessscccecrstscczcccsessescesecseseess pg 100 Mirror p MOdEi s ses eecseececseeeeteeesecresestesecererses ceres ecteesee pg 102 85 fy 86 Choosing a Release Mode The camera supports the following release modes Mode Description S Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release Single frame button is pressed S While shutter release button is held down 1 5 frames per Continuous second low speed CH While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous up to 5 frames per second 5 7 fps when DX format high speed 24 x 16 is selected for Image area see page 60 Frame pictures in monitor pg 90 Recommended at high or low angles or in other situations in which viewfinder is Live view hard to use or when enlarged view in monitor can assist in obtaining very precise focus Use self timer for self portraits
150. e NX 2 available separately pg 391 Record uncompressed TIFF RGB images at a bit TIFF RGB TIFF depth of 8 bits per channel 24 bit color TIFF is RGB supported by a wide variety of imaging applications JPEG fine Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine image quality JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal image quality JPEG basic Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic image quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG fine and one fine quality JPEG image NEF RAW NEF Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG normal JPEG and one normal quality JPEG image NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG basic and one basic quality JPEG image Size priority selected for JPEG compression 66 Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the Le main command dial until the iso auat ws desired setting is displayed in the Coa rear control panel QUAL button Main command dial NORM A JPEG Rear control panel File Size See page 427 for information on the number of pictures that can be recorded at different image quality and size settings NEF RAW Recording The NEF RAW recording item in the shooting menu controls compression pg 69 and bit depth pg 69 for NEF RAW images JPEG
151. e a highlighted preset and display EL PRE Select OSet fine tuning menu pg 143 without completing the next step press instead of pressing the center of the multi selector Select Set E White balance Preset manual Highlight Set and press gt Fine tuning menu for the Edit comment selected white balance preset S Selectimaoe Copy d 0 is displayed pg 143 157 158 Selecting a White Balance Preset the WB Button At a setting of PRE Preset manual presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The current preset is displayed in the rear control panel while the WB button is pressed eey SES WB button Sub command dial Rear control panel EH Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset gt White balance a Incandescent manual U Highlight Preset manual in H a cloudy E the white balance menu S EANA pg 140 and press RES Preset manual 2 Selecta preset iy White balance Highlight the desired preset te 5 and press the center of the cA iy multi selector PRE Select OSet 3 Select Edit comment S White balance Preset manual Highlight Edit comment and E press Pb SP itconnet amp Select image Copy d 0 4 Edit the comment E White balanc
152. e below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use Compatible Batteries The camera can also be used with EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries Removing the Battery Before removing the battery turn the camera off and lift the battery chamber cover latch turn it to the open Q position To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed T Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap ee After confirming that the camera is off remove the rear lens CJ 2 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it clicks into place Mounting index If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M switch select A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual priority 37 EE Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release bu
153. e drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder pg 56 6s P_ie5 F55 Plies F55 PL gt y gt AF S REM AF S REM 7777 AF S REM om mm 276 Em 2781 mh 276 fi Exposure meters on Exposure meters off Exposure meters on The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 318 Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the frame count and number of exposures remaining will be displayed some memory cards may only display this information when the camera is on Top control panel Adjust Camera Settings This tutorial describes how to take photos at default settings T Check camera settings Exposure mode i25 Image size White balance fiso sensitivity Image quality Top control panel Rear control panel Default settings are listed below Option Default Description Page Image NORM Record JPEG images at a compression ratio ualit JPEG of roughly 1 8 Ideal for snapshots 66 q y normal Size priority selected for JPEG compression Image size L FX format images are 6 048 x 4 032 pixels 70 Large in size Iso 100 ISO sensitivity digital equivalent of film 104 sensitivity speed set to ISO 100 White AUTO White balance is adjusted
154. e field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus A M Selection Autofocus with Manual Priority If the lens supports A M selection set the lens A M switch to M manual If the lens supports M A autofocus with manual override MF priority or A M autofocus with manual override AF priority focus can be adjusted manually regardless of the mode selected with the lens See the documentation provided with your lens for details 83 84 The Electronic Rangefinder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 51 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in focus indicator is displayed pg 55 Note that with the subjects listed on page 82 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera measure from the focal plane mark 6 on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in Focal plane mark Releas
155. e last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the ape fact that Saved value can be used with only one lens of each type highlight the desired lens and press gt values The menu shown at right will be AF fine tune displayed press A or W to choose an eg liste identifier and press to save changes F14 and exit a M AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied M Live View Tripod Mode Tuning is not applied to contrast detect autofocus when Tripod is selected in live view mode pg 94 Saved Value Only one value can be stored for each type of lens If a teleconverter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter Firmware Version View the current camera firmware version K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera For information on using the shooting menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Option See page Ey D Lighting 366 Red eye correction 367 X Trim 368 Monochrome 369 Q Filter effects 370 amp 2 Color balance 370 sh Image overlay 371 mo Side by side comparison 3
156. e orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 228 Option Description Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically rotated for display in the camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation pg 351 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in default wide landscape orientation On 287 288 Slide Show Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder pg 281 Hidden images pg 281 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed Audio playback Display menu of voice memo playback options pg 289 To start the slide show highlight Start and press The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress To Description Skip back skip Press to return to previous frame gt to skip ahead to next frame View additional 5 photo info Change photo info displayed pg 229 Pause slide show Pause slide show see following page Voice memo playback may continue after amp button has been pressed Exit to playback men MENU End slide show and return to playback menu Exit to playback cl End slide show and exit to full frame pg 226
157. e preview pg 96 HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display the view through the lens as shown at right Self Timer Mode The self timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits To use the self timer mount the camera on a tripod recommended or place the camera on a stable level surface and follow the steps below 1 Select self timer mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to p Release mode dial 2 Frame the photograph and Focus mode focus selector In single servo autofocus pg 74 photographs can only be taken if the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder v AN Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter In exposure modes other than manual close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure 100 3 Start the timer vA Press the shutter release Vikon A button all the way down to g 4 XQ start the timer The self timer lamp will start to blink stopping two seconds before the photograph is taken To turn the self timer off before a photograph is taken turn the release mode dial to another setting p buih In self timer mode a shutter speed of tin tr is equiva
158. e the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the viewfinder or top control panel button e CET Ce CT CE Er 0 EV 0 3 EV 2 0 EV 4 button pressed 128 Exposure compensation can be set to values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 1 3 EV In general choose positive values to make the subject brighter negative values to make it darker 1EV No exposure compensation At values other than 0 the 0 at the center of the electronic analog exposure displays will flash and a Ei icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel after you release the 4 button The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the electronic analog exposure display by pressing the button Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b3 EV steps for exposure comp pg 314 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E4 button see Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 315 129 130 Bracketing The camera offers three types of bracketing exposure bracketing flash bracketing and white balance bracketing In exposure bracketing pg 131 the camera varies
159. e1 Flash sync speed pg 326 8 CPU lens required N 189 190 The WG AS1 Water Guard The optional WG AS1 is a water guard that covers the base of SB 900 flash units mounted on the D3X increasing the SB 900 s splash resistance by protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and spray Modeling Illumination CLS compatible Speedlights such as the SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 emit a modeling flash when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom Setting e3 Modeling flash pg 327 Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes If they are set to TTL the camera shutter release button will lock and no photographs can be taken Speedlight SB 80DX SB 30 SB 27 SB 28DX gp sypy SB 22s SB 22 S SB 28 SB 26 SB 20 An Flash mode SB 25 SB 24 SB 16B SB 15 A Non TTL auto Y Vv M Manual Vv Vv Vv Vv m Repeating flash Vv REAR Rear curtain sync Vv Vv Vv Vv 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 2 Autofocus is only available with AF Micro lenses 60 mm 105 mm or 200 mm M Notes on Optional Speedlights Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instr
160. ed auto 114 5 Shutter priority auto 116 A Aperture priority auto 118 M Manual 120 Help 31 r Memory buffer 55 89 427 PRE Preset manual 141 148 Numerics 1 005 segment RGB sensor 140 193 3D color matrix metering II 110 111 3D tracking 308 A AN 4 274 cable i 274 AC adapter 387 Accessories 387 Active D Lighting 181 Active folder 293 AE L 81 125 340 AF 74 305 AF activation 309 AF assist 192 AF fine tune 361 AF point selection 311 AF area brackets 12 AF area mode 76 auto area AF 76 77 dynamic area AF 76 77 307 single point AF 76 77 AF C priority selection 305 AF ON button 312 AF ON button 75 94 312 AF ON button for vertical shooting 75 313 AF S priority selection 306 After delete 287 A M switch 37 Amber 144 370 Aperture 38 112 118 124 lock 124 maximum 84 218 minimum 112 430 Aperture priority auto 118 Assign AE L AF L button 340 Assign FUNC button 333 Assign preview button 339 Audio 254 288 289 352 Audio output 254 352 Auto bracketing 130 328 329 Auto bracketing Mode M 329 Auto bracketing set 328 AE amp flash 131 328 AE only 131 328 Flash only 131 328 WB bracketing 135 328 Auto FP high speed sync 186 194 326 Auto image rotation 351 Auto meter off 318 Auto meter off delay 318 Auto area AF 76 77 Autofocus 74 76 78 80 82 305 313 B Backligh
161. ed auto with flexible program P shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A manual M Exposure compensation 5 5 EV in increments of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Exposure bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV Flash bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 2 2 3 or 1 EV 433 434 Exposure White balance bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with AE L AF L button ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index ISO 100 1600 in steps of 1 3 2 or 1 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 50 equivalent below ISO 100 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 or 2 EV ISO 6400 equivalent above ISO 1600 Active D Lighting Can be selected from Auto Extra high High Normal Low or Off Focus Autofocus Nikon Multi CAM 3500FX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors Detection range 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F Lens servo e Autofocus Single servo AF S continuous servo AF C predictive focus tracking automatically activated according to subject status e Manual M Electronic range finding supported Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points AF area mode Single point AF dynamic area AF auto area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pre
162. ed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law
163. ed when the icon is displayed Confirm that the amp icon is displayed in the top control panel before shooting A flashing amp icon indicates that the GPS device is searching for a signal pictures taken while the amp icon is flashing will not include GPS data 223 224 BE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below e Auto meter off Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Enable Auto meter off delay This reduces the drain on the default battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if the shutter release button is pressed all the way down without pausing Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is Disable connected GPS data will always be recorded e Position This item is only available if a GPS device is connected when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading if supported as reported by the GPS device Heading The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is equipped with a digital compass note that the GP 1 is not equipped with a compass Keep the GPS device pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least 20 cm 8 in from the camera
164. ees 128 Battery indicator uu 48 Exposure and flash bracketing TNGICATON 0s seeeecsssesccssteccsseccecsseees 131 WB bracketing indicator 135 Focus mode indicato 74 Long exposure noise reduction TNGICATON 0 seesescssesccssesceeseeceenseees 300 Color space indicator 183 Picture Control indicator 165 Active D Lighting indicator 181 High ISO noise reduction indicator 1 300 Vignette control 299 Release mode single frame continuous indicator 86 Continuous shooting speed 321 Auto area AF indicator 77 Focus points indicator 78 AF area mode indicator 77 3D tracking indicator 77 308 Image area indicator 61 GPS connection indicator 223 Electronic analog exposure CIS PAY nitin 122 15 The Command Dials The main and sub command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings Fn button IZANEN i0 GO A 3 BKT button 4 ven fi 12 3 button ISO button QUAL button WB button 16 HE Image Quality and Size Press the Fn or QUAL button and rotate the command dials Choose an image area pg 64 Fn button Main command dial Shooting information display The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is a
165. elease button is pressed 5 halfway Focus locks when in focus indicator appears Sinal serv in viewfinder and remains locked while shutter release utton is pressed halfway focus lock efault settings ae button is pressed halfway focus lock At default setting shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button c is pressed halfway If subject moves camera will engage Contin sus predictive focus tracking pg 75 to predict final distance to Sane AE subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus release priority rel jority Camera does not focus automatically focus must be M adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring If Manual maximum aperture of lens is f 5 6 or faster viewfinder ocus indicator can be used to confirm focus electronic pg 83 fi indicat b dt firm fi electronii range finding pg 84 but photographs can be taken at any time whether or not subject is in focus Choose single servo AF for landscapes and other stationary sub jects Continuous servo AF may be a better choice with erratically moving subjects Manual focus is recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus 74 The AF 0N Buttons For the purpose of focusing the camera AF ON button pressing either of the AF ON buttons has the same effect as pressing the shu
166. elect the second i Image overlay photograph Image 1 Image2 Preview Press lt or P to highlight Image 2 Repeat Steps 2 5 to select the second photo and a eee adjust gain 7 Highlight the Preview Image overlay column 5 Image 1 Image 2 Press lt or P to highlight the Preview column X0 5 X1 5 E WOK 372 8 Preview the overlay gt Image overlay a Overlay Press A or W to highlight Overlay and press to save the overlay without displaying a preview highlight Save and EO Back Wave press To return to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain press HS 9 save the overlay Press while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the resulting image will be WW 12 5005 10 75 00 mrasoabecns2 displayed full frame in the monitor m Image Overlay Only NEF RAW photographs created with the D3X can be selected for image overlay Other images are not displayed in the selection screen Only NEF RAW photographs with the same image area and bit depth can be combined The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and values for white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for Image 1 Overlays saved in NEF RAW format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording m
167. ent interval timer settings select Interval timer shooting Interval timer shooting between shots While A Stat interval timer photography is in progress the 7 Off interval timer menu will show the starting time Ea ras the shooting interval and the number of 00 0100 5003 x 2 0006 intervals and shots remaining None of these GI GMove Set 13 38 items can be changed while interval timer photography is in progress BE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval time photography can be paused by e Pressing the button between intervals e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing e Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off e Selecting live view self timer or mirror up MuP release modes To resume shooting 1 Choose anew starting E Interval timer shooting e Choose start time trigger Choose a new starting trigger cs and start time as described S oe on page 211 E Move Set EEE 2 Resume shooting E Interval timer shooting A Start Highlight Start gt Restart and press Note that if interval timer photography J 16003 x2 0006 was paused during shooting ED Move Get O13 38 any shots remaining in the current interval will be canceled 215 216 HE Interrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interv
168. enu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression 373 374 Side by Side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs oa i 1 Select Side by side RETOUCH MENU e Dlighti comparison G Reese correction Trim ee T Highlight Side by side Fiter effects comparison and press gt to oo display a picture selection y Lal Sidebyside comparison Ls dialog 2 Select a picture E Side by side comparison Use the multi selector to highlight a picture and press Only retouched copies j bees f 100 2 RA 4 100 5 100 6 shown by a amp icon or EDZo0m WOK photographs that have been retouched can be selected To view the highlighted photograph full frame press and hold the S button 3 Compare the copy with the Options used to original create copy The source image is displayed on the left the retouched copy on the right with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display Press the multi selector in the Source Retouched direction indicated by the image copy arrow adjacent to the highlighted image A V lt or gt to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view the highlighted picture full frame press and hold the R button If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay press A or W to view the other source image To exit to playback mode press the MENU but
169. enu of border options will be displayed pg 266 Press A or F to choose print style from Printer default default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Time stamp Menu of time stamp options will be displayed pg 266 Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu 6 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press Page Size Border Time Stamp and Cropping Choose printer default to print at current printer settings Only options supported by the current printer can be selected Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes See Also See page 420 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 270 BE Creating Index Prints To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print in Step 2 of Printing Multiple Pictures pg 268 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 1 Select Index print 7 PictBridge Highlight Index print in the Print select PictBridge menu pg 268 and 7 Print DPOF press gt The
170. er modified D lighting red eye correction filter effects and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies although this may result in loss of detail Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim pg 369 and Image overlay copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images and copies created from TIFF RGB photos are saved as fine quality JPEG images of the same size as the original Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format 365 D Lighting D Lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs tT l Before Press A or W to choose the amount of correction performed The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph 7 GENDCancel EDZoom Save 366 Red Eye Correction This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction is previewed as shown at right Confirm the effects of red eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image
171. ess 100 Mirror p MOCO wu eccsssscsssccssseessscsssesessecssscesasccsssccesceesseecsneeesneecsseeesaes 102 ISO Sensitivity 103 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually essssssscsssssecsssseccsnseeesees 104 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ne eesssesscssescessesecssecsccsseccesseesenseess 106 Exposure 109 Meteri g ccscicccsssscsscssscusscvsasesssiseduissoaseitesbecbeasdosbnsessoeetcasuiascasseoseseisesioss 110 Exposure MOA Essink iniaiaiai 112 P Programmed Auto ssssesscscssssesseessssessecssnessseessseesessnseressesens 114 5 Shutter Priority AUTO sssssssssssssssressssresessessseessssressseessssresssrenss 116 A Aperture Priority AUTO ssssesssssssesseesssssseeesssssrreresssereeensereeense 118 M ManUal sescssssscsssecsssescecseeccsnsecssnsecccsseccssueeessneeessuteccsnsesesnseesssees 120 Shutter Speed and Aperture LOCkK ssssssssssssssrsssssssssssssrsrssessss 123 Autoexposure AE LOCK sssssssssssssssssssssrssssrssrsrssrssrsresrssrsresrsresresrse 125 Exposure COMpensation ssssssssssssesssssssstsesessssssssseseseesrssssssesesesesss 128 Bracketing ses scdedssccoe caccnsssscdaa hennsscessss an N 130 White Balance 139 White Balance Options ssssssssssssssessssesssssssssesressessssssessresersesssssssss 140 Fine Tuning White Balance sssssssssssssssssssssesssstsessssssrsesssssresssssse 143 Choosing a Color Temperature ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesessssstessssssse 147 Preset Manual scsccss
172. f a oo FX format 36 x 24 image circle The Viewfinder Display The DX format and 5 4 crops are shown below DX format 5 4 62 Image area can be set using the Image area option in the shooting menu or at default settings by pressing the Fn button and rotating a command dial BE The Image Area Menu 1 Select Image area SHOOTING MENU Shooting menu bank f Highlight Image area in the z ore shooting menu pg 290 and aaa press gt Image size Image area 2 Choose an option Le Highlight Auto DX crop or pt Choose image area and Ag A press gt fe joose image area 3 Adjust settings es Image area Choose image area Choose an option and press The selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder pg 62 u FX format 36x24 63 64 BE The Fn Button The image area can be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating the main or sub command dial until the desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder pg 62 This operation the a P default option for the Fn button Tnisutton ee and command dials pg 336 can not be performed while a multiple exposure is being recorded pg 209 The option currently selected for image area can be viewed by pressing the Fn button to display the image area in the top control panel or shooting information display FX format is displayed as 36 x 24 DX format as 24 x 16 and 5 4 as 30 x
173. f continued malfunction contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred Data already recorded to the card will not be affected 407 408 BE Shooting Problem Solution Page Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled e Memory card is full or not inserted CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f number If FE E is displayed in the top control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture Exposure mode S selected with bust a Selected for shutter speed 42 49 384 116 Photos are out of focus Rotate focus mode selector to or e Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock 74 80 83 Problem Solution Page Flash in use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed when using Roster geet i optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or 326 SB R200 Speedlight choose 1 250 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds Focus doesnot lock when Camera is in focus mode C use AE L shutter release button is 81 AF L button to lock focus pressed halfwa
174. focus indicator appears and remain locked until you remove your finger J y jj 7 from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button see following page Continuous servo AF Shutter release Press the AE L AF L button to lock both button focus and exposure an AE L icon appears in the viewfinder see page 125 Focus and exposure will remain locked while the AE L AF L button is pressed even if you later remove your finger from the shutter release button 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots as long as the ay shutter release button is kept pressed halfway allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Focus will also remain locked between shots while the AE L AF L button is pressed Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also For information on choosing the role played by the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 340 81 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed allowing the shutter to be released even
175. following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting Page Custom Setting Page Custom setting bank 304 d Shooting display B Reset custom settings 304 d1 Beep 320 a Autofocus d2 Shooting speed 321 al AF C priority selection 305 d3 Max continuous release 321 a2 AF S priority selection 306 d4 File number sequence 322 a3 Dynamic AF area 307 d5 Control panel viewfinder 323 a4 Focus tracking with lock on 309 d6 Shooting info display 324 a5 AF activation 309 d7 LCD illumination 325 a6 Focus point illumination 310 d8 Exposure delay mode 325 a7 Focus point wrap around 311 e Bracketing flash a8 AF point selection 311 e1 Flash sync speed 326 a9 AF ON button 312 2 Flash shutter speed 327 a10 Vertical AF ON button 313 e3 Modeling flash 327 b Metering exposure e4 Auto bracketing set 328 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 314 e5 Auto bracketing Mode M 329 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 314 e6 Bracketing order 330 b3 EV steps for exposure comp 314 f Controls b4 Easy exposure compensation 315 f1 Multi selector center button 331 b5 Center weighted area 316 f2 Multi selector 332 b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 316 f3 Photo info playback 332 c Timers AE lock f4 Assign FUNC button 333 c1 Shutter release button AE L 318 f5 Assign preview button 339 2 Auto meter off delay 318 f Assign AE L AF
176. for use with CLS see page 193 Flash level is set using monitor pre flashes to measure the light reflected by the subject ensuring that the level is adjusted appropriately for ambient lighting e Advanced Wireless Lighting Allows i TTL flash control with remote wireless flash units e FVlock pg 198 Locks flash level at the metered value allowing a series of photographs to be taken at the same flash level e Auto FP High Speed Sync pg 197 Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field The CLS compatible D3X can be used for flash photography when an optional Speedlight is mounted on the camera s accessory shoe A flash can be used not only when natural lighting is inadequate but also to fill in shadows illuminate back lit subjects and even to add a catch light to the eyes of a portrait subject See the Speedlight manual for details Compatible Flash Units CLS Compatible Flash Units The D3X can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 Hl The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 The principal features of these flash units are listed below Flash unit Feature SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 2 Guide No 3 34 111 38 125 30 98 21 69 10 33 Autopowerzoom 470200 24 105 24 85 4 s mm Wide panel mm
177. g 118 portraits or bring both foreground and background into focus for landscape shots User controls both shutter speed and aperture Manual ON F M pg 120 Set shutter speed to tus tb for long time p9 exposures Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode A aperture priority auto and M manual In other modes exposure mode A is automatically selected when a non CPU lens is attached The exposure mode indicator F or S in the top control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder To choose the exposure mode press the MODE MODE button button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the SS viewfinder or top control panel K C A lt gt ey Main command dial Depth of Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture press and hold Preview button the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera modes F and 5 or the value chosen by the user modes f and M allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Custom Setting e3 Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 and other optional flash units that sup
178. g 169 Sa Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from SF B amp W black and white the default setting Sepia 8 El Toning Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow e Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue and Red Purple pg 169 167 168 M Active D Lighting Contrast and Brightness can not be adjusted when Active D Lighting pg 181 is on Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost when Active D Lighting is turned on M A Auto Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type Gor D lens for best results The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid The Picture Control Grid Pressing the S button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the S button to return to the Picture Control menu Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photograp
179. ge sensor and 1 005 segment RGB sensor 7 manual modes with fine tuning color temperature setting Live view Modes Hand held tripod Autofocus e Hand held Phase detection AF with 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors e Tripod Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame Monitor Monitor 3 in 920 000 dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle 100 frame coverage and brightness adjustment Playback Playback Full frame and thumbnail four or nine images playback with playback zoom slide show histogram display highlight display auto image rotation image comment up to 36 characters and voice memo input and playback Interface USB Hi Speed USB Video output Can be selected from NTSC and PAL 435 Interface HDMI output Type A HDMI connector camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected Ten pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control GP 1 GPS unit or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2 01 or 3 01 requires optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D sub 9 pin connector Supported languages Supported languages Chinese Simplified and Traditional Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL4a battery AC adapter EH 6 AC adapter available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket
180. ge size 70 Image area 60 JPEG compression 68 NEF RAW recording 69 White balance 140 Set Picture Control 162 Manage Picture Control 170 Color space 183 Active D Lighting 181 Vignette control 299 Long exp NR 300 High ISO NR 300 ISO sensitivity settings 104 Live view 90 Multiple exposure 206 Interval timer shooting 211 290 Shooting Menu Bank Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks With the exceptions of Interval timer shooting Multiple exposure and modifications to Picture Controls quick adjust and other manual adjustments changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described below Shooting Menu Bank The top control panel and shooting information displays show the current shooting menu bank E es il ael ON SOMIN ED EE Renaming Shooting Menu Banks Selecting Rename in the
181. ged while shooting a multiple exposure If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated changes to shutter speed exposure si 1Stepspd modes Sand M and aperture exposure modes A aperture and M are made in increments of 1 EV regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 314 Choose non Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to Non Pl CPU lens choose a lens number specified using the Non CPU number lens data option pg 218 Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials for vertical shooting to choose a focus point pg 337 x Focus point selection Shootin If this option is selected the shooting menu bank sai sa can be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating a command dial When t dynamic area AF is selected in focus mode C continuous servo autofocus the number of focus points pg 307 can be selected by pressing Dynamic AF the Fn button and rotating a command dial The fa 9 area focus points used for dynamic area AF are displayed in the viewfinder while the Fn button is pressed if 51 points 3D tracking is selected 3D will be displayed in the viewfinder No operation is performed when the command None dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed Portrait Tall Orientation Photographs To use the command dials to select the focus point when framing shots in p
182. graphs will be stored in the selected folder M Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Number of Folders Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of folders 295 File Naming Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space _DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC_0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see steps 2 and 3 of Renaming Shooting Menu Banks pg 292 Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images TIF for TIFF RGB images JPG for JPEG images and NDF for dust off reference data Slot 2 Choose the role played by the secondary card slot when two memory cards are inserted in the camera pg 72 Image Quality Choose image quality pg 66 296 Image Size Choose the size at
183. gt E c Number of shots 2 Pa Auto gain ON gt 5 Set gain gt Multiple exposure E Auto gain Highlight one of the following options and press Option Description Gain adjusted according to number of exposures actually recorded gain for each exposure is set to 2 for 2 exposures 3 for 3 exposures etc Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark On default Off 207 208 6 Select Done F Multiple exposure a Highlight Done and press TC ca Number of shots A icon will be displayed in se Auto sain an the top control panel To exit without taking a multiple exposure select Multiple P_i2S i5 CJE exposure gt Reset in the eb bs shooting menu tan OG 2 te F Multiple exposure Le i i amp Frame a photograph focus and shoot In continuous high speed and continuous low speed release modes pg 86 the camera will record all exposures in a single burst In single frame release mode one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 210 The icon will blink until shooting ends When shooting ends multiple exposure mode will end and the AF S REM icon will no
184. h Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of Normal ISO 500 and higher While photographs are being NORN default processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from LOW Bow High Normal and Low Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of off Hi 0 3 and higher The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NRJ 300 ISO Sensitivity Settings Adjust ISO sensitivity and ISO sensitivity auto control settings pp 104 106 Live View Choose a live view mode and the release mode that will be used when the camera is in live view mode pg 91 Multiple Exposure Create a single photograph from two to ten exposures pg 206 Interval Timer Shooting Take photographs automatically at pre selected intervals Use for time lapse movies of such subjects as flowers opening or butterflies emerging from cocoons pg 211 301 302 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences In addition to Custom Settings Custom setting bank and B Reset custom settings settings in the Custom Settings menu are divided into the six groups shown at right Main menu E Custom setting bank LA R Reset custom settings a Autofocus b Metering exposure c Timers AE lock d Shooting dis
185. hanging shooting menu settings Active Folder Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored BE New Folder Number 1 Select New folder Ba Active folder E New folder number number i100 Highlight New folder number and press P im ee Move Set OROK 293 294 2 Choose a folder number Press the lt or gt to highlight a digit press A or W to change If a folder with the selected number already exists a D or i icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number e L Folder is empty e Folder is partially full Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No further pictures can be stored in this folder Save changes and exit Press to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full HE Select Folder 1 Choose Select folder Highlight Select folder and press gt Highlight a folder ES Active folder P Select folder Press A or W to highlight a Y 102NCD3X folder EE TOE E Select the highlighted folder Press to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button Subsequent photo
186. he viewfinder and top control panel If two memory cards are inserted the Arria tr main command dial can be used to T T i select the card to be formatted For Ca check that the correct card is selected in the top control panel before proceeding To exit without formatting the memory card press any button other than the s MODE and it buttons 45 46 3 Press the buttons again Press the s MODE and tt buttons together a second time to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the top control panel will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at acai oe current settings and the frame count eal Geib displays will show Pies 35 iad No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the top control panel and viewfinder will show E If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL4a battery and no memory card inserted will be displayed in the top control panel See Also Lies 55 gt ao Ce See page 347 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card option in the setup menu Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting 1 Lift the diopter adjustment knob Remove the lens cap turn the camera
187. he number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture programmed auto aperture shutter priority auto or shutter speed aperture priority auto manual exposure mode When On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO sensitivity auto control in shooting menu and no flash is attached the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing mode M pg 329 can be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed and or aperture or by varying flash level alone EE White Balance Bracketing 1 Select white balance bracketing Ge 24 Ato bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom 4 a AER Setting e4 Auto bracketing se
188. he steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting and produce results with colors noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor BE Creating a Multiple Exposure Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s 1 Select Multiple exposure SHOOTING MENU 1 Active D Lighting OFF 7 Highlight Multiple exposure z bene hs in the shooting menu pg 290 and press P ke TV El Interval timer shooting OFF 2 Select Number of shots ea Le Highlight Number of shots E and press gt A Number of shots 2 qe Auto gain ON Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s select On for the Image review pg 287 option in the playback menu and extend the monitor off delay using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 319 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4 3 Select the number of shots BS Multinle exoosure E Number of shots Press A or W to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press 4 Select Auto gain Multiple exposure Le Highlight Auto gain and press Boca
189. hen framing accessories Right Angle Magnifying Viewing Attachment DR 5 Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 4 The DR 5 and DR 4 attach to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position The DR 5 can also magnify the view through the viewfinder by 2 x for greater precision when framing note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when the view is magnified Eyepiece Adapter DK 18 The DK 18 is used when attaching the DG 2 Magnifier or DR 3 Right Angle Viewing Attachment to the D3X 389 390 Filters e Nikon filters can be divided into three types screw in slip in and rear interchange Use Nikon filters filters manufactured by other makers may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding The D3X can not be used with linear polarizing filters Use the C PL circular polarizing filter instead e Use NC and L37C filters to protect the lens e To prevent moir use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1x Y44 Y48 Y52 056 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 Optional flash units Nikon Speedlights SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB
190. highlight Rank items and press gt 2 Select an item Be Rank items s Image quality NORM Highlight the item you wish to NEF RAM rec H move and press P Select items 3 Position the item e Image quality JPEG compression Press Aor Wto move the NEF RAW recording item up or down in My Menu _ 4 Assign FUNC button and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items 1 Move OOK Reordering Items in My Menu The item currently highlighted in My Menu can be moved up or down by pressing the ES button and pressing A or V Release the E button when the operation is complete 379 380 Displaying Recent Settings To display the twenty most recently used settings select Recent settings for My Menu gt Choose tab 1 Select Choose tab MY MENU e Image quality In My Menu highlight E NEF RAM recording Choose tab and press gt ma fion FUNC button TE Remove items Rank items a aJi Choose tab i 2 Select Recent Settings E Choose tab Highlight Recent settings and press The name of the menu will change from MY MENU to RECENT SETTINGS T My Menu S CA E Recent settings Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used To view My Menu again select My Menu for Recent settings gt Choose tab Technical Notes Camera Care Options and Resources This chapter covers the following topics
191. his setting the camera will automatically focus on the subject in the selected focus point when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in focus 6 Choose matrix metering Metering selector Press the metering selector lock button and rotate the metering selector to amp matrix metering Matrix metering uses information from the 1 005 segment RGB sensor to ensure optimal results for the entire frame 53 54 Ready the Camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable When framing photographs in portrait tall orientation unlock the shutter release button for vertical shooting pg 5 and hold the camera as shown at right For information on framing photographs in the monitor see page 90 Focus and Shoot 1 Press the shutter release button halfway to focus pg 56 At default settings the J camera will focus on the subject in the center Buffer focus point Frame a indicator capacity photo in the viewfinder with the main subject positioned in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway If the camera is able to focus the in foc
192. hs The following filter effects are available Option Description Yellow Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness Orange of the sky in landscape photographs Orange produces more Red contrast than yellow red more contrast than orange A D o lt Green Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing W when Toning is selected displays SS Monochrome saturation options Press lt or gt to adjust sharpening saturation Saturation control is not available when B amp W black and white is selected Filter effects E ZE Cyanotype 4 zj EA GQAGrid WOK Reset Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based 169 170 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture SHOOTING MENU PEG compression Control NEF RAW recording a Y White balance AUTO r Set Picture Control ED In the shooting menu pg 290 are Pecos highlight Manage Picture E Control and press gt E Vignette control ON 2 Select Save edit E Manage Picture Control Le A Y Save edit gt ca fe Highlight Sa
193. ibed below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter If the battery level is below 2a 60 turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL4a battery or connect an optional EH 6 AC adapter Select Lock mirror up for cleaning amma Remove the lens and turn the camera on Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu pg 346 and press gt note that this option is not available at battery levels of lt 2 or below Press Lock mirror up for cleaning The message shown at right will be an atter aasa Mane displayed in the monitor and a row of ig e te iror lifts and dashes will appear in the top control j eaaa panel and viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off 4 Raise the mirror Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the top control panel will blink 5 Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If
194. ice representative 417 418 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page No memor Camera cannot Turn camera off and ad Y detect memory confirm that card is 42 card correctly inserted e Error accessing Use Nikon 394 This memory memory card approved card card cannot e Check that contacts be used r are clean If card is CHA Card may be blinks damaged contact damaged retailer or Nikon Insert another representative card e Unable to create Delete files or insert 42 281 new folder new memory card This card is not Memory card has Format memory card Far f formatted h not been formatted or insert new 42 45 blinks Format the for use in camera memory card card Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Select folder Folder No images on containing images i memory card orin from Playback folder contains no A 42 281 inad folder s selected menu or insert ges for playback different memory card No images can be played back until another folder has All photos in Allimages are been selected or _ current folder are ae 281 hidden Hide image used to hidden allow at least one image to be displayed File has been i created or modified File does not 3 A ae using a computer File can not be played containimage 5 data or different make of back on camera camera or file
195. igher shutter speeds or smaller apertures This chapter describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ssscseeee pg 104 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ssesssseseossosossoscssoscesese pg 106 103 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 100 and ISO 1600 in steps equivalent to 1 3 EV Settings of from about 0 3 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0 3 2 EV above ISO 1600 are also available for special situations ISO sensitivity can be adjusted e by pressing the ISO button and K rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is L O displayed in the control panels S or viewfinder ISO button Main command dial Iso iad Top control panel Rear control panel Viewfinder ISO sensitivity 1600 The ISO Sensitivity Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu pg 290 104 ISO Sensitivity Settings The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 314 Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value ISO sensitivity settings available Lo 1 Lo 0 7 Lo 0 3 100 125 160 200 250 i i 320 400 500 640 800 1000 1250 1600 Hi 0 3 Hi 0 7 Hi 1 Hi 2 Lo 1 Lo 0 5 100 140 200 280 400 560 800 1 2 step 1100 1600 Hi 0 5 Hi 1 Hi 2
196. ighting y 27 Date of recording 20 File MAME ssssssssesseseessteseeeesees 28 Slot NUMDEL scsssccsssecessseceseeees 21 Image quality esses 29 White balance esses 22 IMAGE SIZC cssssssseseeesssssssseseseeeeeeees Color temperature 23 Image area White balance fine tuning 143 E Preset manual ssssssssssssssesssssse 148 IN dICAtOTF oe sseeeesssseecssseccesseeceenseeeee 356 Be Color SPACE a errvnnnnnerrrnnn 183 25 Time Of recording nesses 40 2 Displayed in yellow if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four or nine images press the M9 button and rotate the main command dial i 100 1 saa 100 2 fl Is E 100NCD3X DSC_0001 JPG 15 12 2008 10 75 00 mD NORMAL 6048x4032 Full frame playback Thumbnail playback 241 The following operations can be performed while thumbnails are displayed To Description Change number of images displayed Press Q button and rotate main command to left to display one four or nine images per page Toggle full frame playback Press center of multi selector to switch back and forth between full frame and thumbnail playback Highlight images Use multi selector to highlight images for f
197. images are viewed on the camera histograms and highlights EMARE are not displayed 354 Battery Info View information on the battery currently E Battery info inserted in the camera Bat meter Pic meter gg Calibration 4 E Charging life 0 4 2 Done Item Description Bat meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage Pic meter The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for example when measuring preset white balance Calibration e CAL Due to repeated use and recharging calibration is required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately recalibrate battery before charging pg 437 e Calibration not required Charging life A five level display showing battery age 0 1 indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher 355 356 Wireless Transmitter This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless network using an opti
198. in slot 1 the JPEG Slot 2 ag U JPEG image to the memory card in slot 2 At other image qualities this option is the same as Backup 1 Backup RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 When the above options are selected the shutter release will be disabled when either of the memory cards is full The viewfinder and top control panel show the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of available memory Voice memos pg 250 are appended to the copy recorded to the memory card in slot 1 72 Focus Controlling How the Camera Focuses This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses FOCUS MOCO ircncc ccscsecccussosossesecssssesssncevacesccsrecssescenescersscseesesss pg 74 ASAT eal MOC iiccccccccccccucssecoscscvesnsscneeccescas cateseseses soereserecsenes pg 76 Focus Point Selection s c scessssssssssesesssessscaserssesseees pg 78 Focus LOCK eeen aeneae sososrenscscescscenesvucesccsreesavscscescerunceeesvess pg 80 EER E e R E A AA pg 83 73 Focus Mode Focus mode is controlled by the Focus mode selector focus mode selector on the front of the camera autofocus AF modes in which the camera focuses automatically when the shutter release button is There are two pressed halfway and one manual focus mode in which focus must be adjusted manually using the focusing ring on the lens Option Description Camera focuses when shutter r
199. in the thumbnail list and then press the Om button Voice Memos Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos that may have been recorded with the images Voice memo overwrite status can not be set separately Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the O n and i buttons together for about two seconds Deleting Individual Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or the photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list press the t button Once deleted photographs can not be recovered 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the T button A confirmation dialog will be displayed rowan gan i 100NCD3X i on J 15 12 2008 10 15 01 Delete Wes Cancel 100 3 100 4 Thumbnail playback To delete the photograph press the t v J button again To exit without deleting D T TN the photograph press the P button 245 246 Voice Memos If a voice memo has been recorded with the selected image the confirmation dialog shown Delete at right will be displayed when the tt button is Sancel pressed i Image sound a e Image sound Select this option and press the Sound only E 100NCD3X DSC_0001 15 12 2008 10 15 00 button to delete
200. in the top control panel the first time the camera is used check that clock settings including time zone and daylight saving time are correct The icon will stop flashing when the amp button is pressed to exit the menu The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by a separate non rechargeable CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about four years When this battery is exhausted a icon will be displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on For information on replacing the clock battery see page 398 The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary 41 42 Insert a Memory Card The camera stores photographs on CompactFlash and microdrive memory cards available separately pg 394 Up to two memory cards can be inserted in the camera simultaneously The following section describes how to insert and format a memory card 1 Turn the camera off Power switch e Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards 2 Open the card slot cover Open the door protecting the card slot cover release button 0 and press the release button to open the card slot Memory Card Slots Slot 1 is for the main card the card in slot 2 plays a Slot 1 backup or secondary role If the default setting of Overflow is sele
201. ing objects In exposure modes F and A Rear curtain SIOW rear curtain sync is used to capture both subject sync and background Tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake In this mode available only with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 red eye reduction pre flash lights for approximately one second before main flash Pupils in subject s eyes to contract reducing red eye effect sometimes caused by flash Owing to one second Red eye shutter release delay this mode is not recommended reduction with moving subjects or in other situations in which quick shutter response is required Avoid moving camera while red eye reduction pre flash is lit 194 Flash mode Description rt Combines red eye reduction with slow sync Use for Low portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery Red eye Available only with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 reduction with iN exposure modes F and A Tripod is recommended to slow sync Prevent blurring caused by camera shake 195 BE Choosing a Flash Mode To choose the flash mode press the button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is selected in the top control panel Main command dial Front curtain sync Slow sync Rear curtain sync Ao REAR Red eye reduction with Red eye reduction 3 slow sync 4 1 Available only in exposure modes F and A In modes Sand M front
202. ion option the default setting for Preview command dials is None 339 340 f6 Assign AE L AF L Button Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button either by itself AE L AF L button press or when used in combination with the command dials AE L AF L command dials The options available for AE L AF L button press are the same as for FUNC button press pg 333 except that AE L AF L button press defaults to AE AF lock and has an additional AF 0N option if this option is selected pressing the AE L AF L button has the same effect as pressing the AF 0N button to initiate autofocus The options available for AE L AF L command dials are the same as for FUNC button dials pg 336 except that AE L AF L command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd aperture and Focus point selection options f7 Customize Command Dials This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials Option Description Controls the direction of the command dials Choose No the default option for normal command dial operation or Yes to reverse the rotation of the command dials This setting also applies to the command dials for vertical shooting At the default setting of Off the main command dial controls shutter speed and the sub command dial controls aperture If On is selected the main command dial will control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed
203. ites e For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com e For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http imaging nikon com Xxiv Introduction This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera including the names of camera parts OVENVIGW E E E E T pg 2 Getting to Know the Camera ssssssssssscsssssececsesesees pg 3 Gamera BOA aaen A tire AA Aa tar eceaere TheslopiGontroliPanel ers e a eerie The Rear Control Panel The Viewfinder Display The Shooting Information Display ssssesccssesecrseescrseeseessecs pg 14 The GommandDialsweenencetene A ee A EA pg 16 Q ick Start GUId E aa ae aeee e AA A AREA pg 23 Overview Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly to get the most from the camera and keep them where they will be read by all those who use the product M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Ni
204. iv v Al Al modified Nikkor or __ 0 a e as wlz Nikon Series E lenses A lia Medical Nikkor 120mm 16 z 4 Vv Vv Vv z Reflex Nikkor Yvi Www w PC Nikkor v5 Yvi w v m Al type Teleconverter v Y v lvl a PB 6 Bellows Focusing v3 vyil lv2 lv Attachment 9 Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 0r 13 vs Y iw vY PN 11 1 IX Nikkor lenses can not be used 2 Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses 3 Spot metering meters selected focus point 4 The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and or tilting the lens or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used 5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting 6 Manual exposure mode only 7 Can be used with AF S and AF I lenses only pg 385 8 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster 10 11 12 16 17 20 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lt New gt or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lens at maximum zoom in focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster Some lenses can not be used see page 384 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8 ED tripod mount is limited by came
205. kon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual Camera Body 1 BKT bracketing button wees 131 135 328 2 Release mode dial lock FElCASC seesssesseessesssesssesseesseees 87 3 Release mode dial 4 Eyelet for camera strap 5 4 flash mode button 6 N command lock DUTTON isisisi 123 124 7 Focal plane mark 06 84 8 Metering selector 111 9 Metering selector lock button eesseessessseessesseesseeeee 111 10 Power SWitCh ssssssssssssss
206. l see page 384 for information on lens types With other CPU lenses 3D range information is not included color matrix metering Il Color matrix metering is available when focal length and maximum aperture of non CPU lens are specified using Non CPU lens data item in setup menu see page 218 center weighted metering is used if focal length or aperture is not specified See Also For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center weighted metering see Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 316 For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure pg 316 111 112 Exposure Mode Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture when adjusting exposure Four modes are available programmed auto F shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A and manual M Mode Description Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for Programmed pane optimal exposure Recommended for snapshots pg 114 and in other situations in which there is little time p9 to adjust camera settings Shutter priority User chooses shutter speed camera selects 5 auto aperture for best results Use to freeze or blur pg 116 motion User chooses aperture camera selects shutter Aperture AG speed for best results Use to blur background for A priority auto p
207. l begin again from 0001 On default File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs Off Same as for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 RESET Reset 7 File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert anew memory card d5 Control Panel Viewfinder Choose the information displayed in the viewfinder and rear control panel Option Description Rear control panel Choose from ISO sensitivity IS0 the default setting and Exposures remaining If Exposures remaining is selected ISO sensitivity will only be displayed while the ISO button is pressed Viewfinder display Choose from Frame count 4 the default setting and Exposures remaining amp Note that regardless of the option selected memory buffer capacity will be shown while the
208. lay mode pg 282 shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photograph as described on page 357 GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken NIKON D IN 335 35 977 i A T fae 43 696 AS imime 35a m 215 12 2008 P 1 125 F5 6 59100 85mm 715 00 MBAUTO 0 O AdobeRGB FISD ale E 100NCD3X DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL HL 100NCD3X DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2008 10 15 00 116048x4032 15 12 2008 10 15 00 1T6048x4032 Overview data GPS data ARTIST NIKON TARO COPYRI GHT E Shooting data page 4 229 230 HE File Information 15 14 13 D3X DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 7 12 2008 10 15 00 pss I5 1016048x4032 12 11 10 9 8 1 Voice MEMO ICON uu esses 248 8 IMAGE SIZE wesc eesssessstessseessetesssees 70 2 Protect status 244 9 Image area 60 3 Retouch indicator 363 10 Image authentication 356 A FOCUS point eeeesesecccceeessseeseess 282 11 Time of recording s 40 5 AF area brackets 47 92 12 Date of recording seceseeee 40 6 Frame number 13 Slot NUMDET LQ eeecsessssecsseenseeesees 42 total number of frames 14 Folder name ccssssssssssssssssssesseeee 293 7 Image quality rsressrsersennenene 66 15 File NAME ane sessecssseerssreeseeeseneoes 296 1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode pg 282 2 Displayed in yellow if DX forma
209. layback mode displays the following options Option Description Thumbnail on off default Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between full frame and thumbnail playback In both full frame and thumbnail playback a histogram is displayed while the center of the multi selector is pressed Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between full frame or thumbnail playback and playback zoom Q Zoomon Choose the initial zoom setting from Low off magnification Medium magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point View histograms 331 332 HE Live View Selecting Live view displays the following options Option Description Select center a Pressing the center of the multi selector in live RESET focus point view selects the center focus point default P Press the center of the multi selector to toggle zoom on and off Choose the initial zoom setting from Low magnification Medium S Zoomonion magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point Pressing the center of the multi selector has no Not used Mee effect in live view f2 Multi Selector If Reset meter off delay is selected operating the multi selector when the exposure meters are off pg 50 will activate the exposure meters If Do nothing the default option is selected
210. lds such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside Camera wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled body water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and Lens lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can mirror and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Monitor Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals 395 Replacing the Focusing Screen A type B clear matte VI focusing screen is inserted in the camera at shipment To insert an optional type E clear matte VI focusing screen for D3X cameras pg 388 1 Remove the lens Turn the camera off and remove the lens 2 Unlatch the screen holder Using the tweezers supplied with the focusing screen pull the focusing screen la
211. lease button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option 10 Reverse Indicators At the default setting of het inisqininiee 07 the exposure indicators in the top control panel and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select guisihininteth 70 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right 345 T The Setup Menu Camera Setup The setup menu contains the options listed below For information on using the setup menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Option See page Format memory card 347 LCD brightness 347 Lock mirror up for cleaning 400 Video mode 348 HDMI 348 World time 349 Language 349 Image comment 350 Auto image rotation 351 Voice memo 248 Voice memo overwrite 249 Voice memo button 249 Audio output 254 USB 352 Dust off ref photo 353 Battery info 355 Wireless transmitter 2 261 Image authentication 356 Copyright information 357 Save load settings 358 GPS 221 Virtual horizon 360 Non CPU lens data 218 AF fine tune 361 Firmware version 362 1 Not available when battery
212. lector to highlight pictures or press the center of the multi selector again to display the highlighted picture full frame C0001 JPG NORMAL 10 75 00 6048x4032 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options Start printing Page size No of copies Border Time stamp Cropping 265 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press to select Option Description Page size Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu y Page size Printer default 3 5x5in 5x7in A4 No of copies Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or to choose number of copies maximum 99 then press to select and return to previous menu a No of copies Border Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to choose print style from Printer default default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu m Border APrinter default Print with border No border Time stamp Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo
213. lent to approximately 1 10 s See Also For information on changing the timer duration see Custom Setting c3 Self timer delay pg 319 For information on setting a beep to sound during the timer count down see Custom Setting d1 Beep pg 320 101 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is recommended 1 Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Mup Oy Release mode dial 2 Raise the mirror 8 Frame the picture focus and then press 2 the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror m Using the Viewfinder Note that autofocus metering and framing can not be confirmed in the viewfinder while mirror is raised 3 Takea picture Press the shutter release button all the zA way down again to take a picture To prevent blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord pg 392 The mirror lowers when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised 102 ISO Sensitivity Reacting Faster to Light ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing h
214. lly if subject briefly leaves selected focus point camera will focus based on information from surrounding points Number of focus points used can fs be selected from 9 21 and 51 using Custom Setting a3 Dynamic Dynamic AF area pg 307 If 51 points 3D tracking area AF is selected for Custom Setting a3 focus point will be selected automatically using 3D tracking e Insingle servo AF pg 74 user selects focus point manually camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point If type G or Dlens is used camera can distinguish human subjects C from background for improved Auto area AF subject detection In single servo AF active focus points are highlighted for about one second after camera focuses Active focus points are not displayed in continuous servo AF AF Area Mode 2 EmA AFS am AF area mode is shown in the shooting GHA _ REM information display when the E button is i 15 pressed i ON SON ES AF area mode indicator AF areamode Information display Single point AF Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 307 9 points Sen default Seri tee D P 21 points peer eres paj ae eal SHS i area AF 51 points FERIM AA 51 points 3D tracking Auto area AF Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information
215. lly if e The MENU button is pressed to display the menus e The monitor is turned off by pressing the A button or by pressing the shutter release button halfway e The camera is turned off e Another image is selected 253 254 Voice Memo Playback Options The Audio output option in the setup menu BRIE controls whether voice memos are played back over the camera s built in speaker or by KAri see y E Avot HDMI audio vid tput a device to which the camera is connected Pout via an HDMI or audio video cable When sound is played back over the built in speaker the Audio output option also controls playback volume Option Description Voice memos are played i Audio output back over built in speaker K Selecting this option t a i t Via speaker displays menu shown at 3 E q right Press A or W to default z 1 5 change volume Beep will sound when option is selected Press to make selection and return to setup menu AVOUT HDMI audio Audio signal output to HDMI or A V OUT terminal video output Voice memos are not played back icon is X Off displayed when photo for which voice memo exists is viewed in monitor Connections Connecting to External Devices This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer how to print pictures and how to view them on a television set Connecting tO a COMPUTED ssesesessssssososesssessososesessososo pg 256 Direct U
216. longer be displayed foo A 2G Repeat steps 1 7 to take additional multiple exposures vV Multiple Exposure Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Live view pg 90 can not be used to record multiple exposures The information listed in the playback photo information display including date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point Voice Memos The camera stores only the last voice memo created during a multiple exposure Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect memory cards can not be formatted and the following can not be changed image area bracketing and shooting menu options other than Whi
217. lue metered in a 4 mm 0 16 in circle centered on the selected focus point In center weighted metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in the center of the viewfinder the default area for center weighted metering is shown by the 12 mm circle in the viewfinder Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be changed without altering the metered value for exposure Exposure mode Settings P Shutter speed and aperture flexible program pg 115 5 Shutter speed A Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and top control panel Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect changes to metering take effect when the lock is released See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 318 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 340 127 Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker In exposure mode M only the exposure information shown in the electronic analog exposure display is affected shutter speed and aperture do not change To choose a value for exposure compensation press the 4 button and rotat
218. make them blue Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g e 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired e 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired 145 146 HE The WB Button At settings other than I Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber A blue B axis pg 144 to fine tune white balance when Mf or PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 143 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired pg 145 Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the rear control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 a lt gt icon appears in the rear control panel lt y 5 WB button Sub command dial z gt E a 7 Re
219. mal Shooting Image size pg 70 E menu White balance pg 140 Auto Fine tuning pg 143 off Choose color temp pg 147 5000 K Focus point pg 78 Center Exposure mode pg 112 Programmed auto Flexible program pg 115 off Shutter speed and aperture lock pg 123 Off Other AE lock hold pg 125 Off settings Exposure compensation pg 128 Off Bracketing pg 130 Off Flash mode pg 194 Front curtain sync FV lock pg 198 Off Multiple exposure pg 206 Off 1 If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored 2 Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 291 Settings in all other banks are unaffected 422 EE Defaults Restored with Reset Shooting Menu pg 293 Option Default File naming pg 296 DSC Slot 2 pg 72 Overflow Image quality pg 66 JPEG normal Image size pg 70 Large Image area pg 60 Auto DX crop pg 60 On Choose image areal pg 61 FX format 36 x 24 JPEG compression pg 68 Size priority NEF RAW recording pg 69 Type pg 69 Lossless compressed NEF RAW bit depth pg 69 12 bit White balance pg 140 Auto Fine tuning pg 143 Off Choose color temp pg 147 5000K Set Picture Control pg 162 Standard
220. mat pg 61 can be selected from 5 the default setting 6 and 7 frames per second fps Regardless of the setting chosen the maximum frame rate for other formats is fixed at 5 fps Continuous high speed Choose the frame advance rate for CL continuous low speed mode from values between 1 and 5 fps The default setting is 3 fps Continuous low speed d3 Max Continuous Release The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 130 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3 shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills See page 427 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer 321 322 d4 File Number Sequence When a photograph is taken the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or anew memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or anew memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder whichever is higher If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering wil
221. mber of prints is 1 Press when all the desired pictures have been selected Set EQZoom ONOK 272 3 Select imprint options ia Print set DPOF I Select set Highlight the following options and press gt to toggle the highlighted H option on or off to complete the print EC morint date order without including this information proceed to Step 4 Data imprint Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order e Imprint date Print date of recording on all pictures in print order 4 Complete the print order wa Print set OPOP I Select set Highlight Done and press amp to complete the print order Done O Data imprint Imprint date 1 Print Set To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order pg 268 DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW pg 66 can not be selected for printing using this option Print orders may not print correctly if images are dele
222. minated by regular geometric patterns e g blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper e The subject is moving Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters 97 p 98 m Shooting in Live View Mode Although they will not appear in the final picture banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or if an object moves at high speed through the frame Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned Bright spots may also appear When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view mode can be used for up to an hour Note however that when used in live view mode for extended periods the camera may become noticeably warm and the temperature of its internal circuits may rise resulting in image noise and unusual colors To prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambient temperatures thi
223. mode or thumbnail playback pg 241 Exit to shooting Press shutter release button halfway to return mode EA to shooting mode A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback Select Restart to restart if the slide was paused the show wo will resume from the next slide or Exit to bye return to the playback menu BE Audio Playback Choose On to play voice memos during slide shows The following options will be displayed Option Description Playback ends when next frame is displayed even if entire memo has not been played Next frame is not displayed until entire memo has been played even if frame interval is shorter than voice memo Frame interval Length of voice memo Choose Off the default option to disable voice memo playback during slide shows Print Set DPOF Choose Select set to select pictures for printing on a DPOF compatible device pg 272 Choose Deselect all to remove all pictures from the current print order 289 The Shooting Menu Shooting Options The shooting menu contains the options listed below For information on using the shooting menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Option See page Shooting menu bank 291 Reset shooting menu 293 Active folder 293 File naming 296 Slot 2 72 Image quality 66 Ima
224. mum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100 note that if the value selected for Maximum sensitivity is lower than the value currently selected for ISO sensitivity the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be used In exposure modes F and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed 4000 1 Slower shutter speeds may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity When On is selected the viewfinder and NORM AO rear control panel show ISO AUTO When igo B sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the viewfinder Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 300 When a flash is used the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 326 Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken with a flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select exposure mode f or Mand choose a
225. n using the electronic analog exposure displays as a tilt meter see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button press pg 334 For information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view see page 99 Non CPU Lens Data By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture for up to nine non CPU lenses the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions pg 218 AF Fine Tune Fine tune focus for up to 20 lens types AF tuning is not recommended in most situations use only when required Option Description ae e 0n Turn AF tuning on On Off e Off default Turn AF tuning off Tune AF for the current lens CPU Move focal lenses only Press A or W to point away Current Saved choose a value between 20 and from camera value value 20 Values for up to 20 lens types BB AF fine tne can be stored Only one value can t Saved value be stored for each type of lens g mn No ic Choose the AF tuning value used E Default when no previously saved value Adiust exists for the current lens CPU lenses only Move focal Previous point toward value camera 361 362 Option Description List previously saved AF tuning values If a value exists for the current lens it will be shown with a 1 icon To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press i To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as th
226. natural results Choose for ENL Neutral photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect EWI Vivid Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors EMC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs ESD Standard BE Choosing a Picture Control 1 Select Set Picture Control SHOOTING MENU 10 JPEG compression k In the shooting menu pg 290 z _ a highlight Set Picture Control A G z Col RGB and press gt S Active Distting pi EJ Vignette control ON 2 Select a Picture Control E Set Picture Control 10 ED Standard Highlight the desired Picture _ 2 Control and press eRe ee QGrid GAdiust 164 The Picture Control Grid Pressing the S button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected To select a different Picture Control press A or Y then press to display Picture Control options and press The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information display when the MA button is pressed List GAdiust OROK CON SOEN E9 Picture Control indicator 165 Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the user
227. ncement Flash Photography Other Shooting Options E More About Playback Voice Memos Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes Q amp A Index Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index Hl New Features Question Key phrase See page How do take pictures in 35mm format Image area 60 How do take high quality NEF RAW 14 bit NEF RAW 69 photos How do record photographs using two Slot 2 72 memory cards Can use the monitor as a viewfinder Live view 90 Can control how photos are processed Picture Controls 162 How do preserve details in shadows and ere highlights Active D Lighting 181 How do focus on erratically moving 3D tracking 308 subjects Can adjust focus separately for different AF fine tune 361 lenses HE Camera Setup Question Key phrase See page How do focus the viewfinder Viewfinder focus 47 a do I keep the monitor from turning Monitor off delay 319 How do I keep the shutter speed and ito met rotf 50 318 aperture displays from turning off Question Key phrase See page How do set the clock How do set the clock for daylight savings time World time 40 349 How do I change time zones when travel How do adjust monitor brightness for LCD brightness 347 menus or playback How do restore default settings Two button reset 204 How do
228. nd press gt Manage Picture Control E Rename EECV IV ID 02 II ate STANDARD 02 e Rename the Picture Control Rename the Picture Control as described on page 172 E Rename TA I h amp 4 i 0123456789 lt gt 2 NBCDEFGHIJKL MNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 2Cursor lnput OOK 177 HE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera 1 Select Delete L Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control sweleit menu highlight Delete and Betas fe Load save press P he 2 Select a Picture Control i Manage Picture Control 1 Delete i Highlight a custom Picture i D Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt 3 Select Yes Manage Picture Control 1 Delete Highlight Yes and press to a J Dale Pitre contra delete the selected Picture STANDARD 02 Control es i No Nikon Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera Standard Neutral Vivid and Monochrome can not be renamed or deleted 178 HE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card 1 Select Load save ey Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control Saveledit menu highlight Load save eee and press gt ST Load save gt 2 2 Select Delete from card E Manage Picture Control Highlight Delete from card and press gt E Load save Copy to camera Delete from card Copy to card 179 3 Select a Picture Control
229. nd AE Re x remains locked until the button is pressed a second Hold P time or the exposure meters turn off M AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed y p The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn Flash off p button is pressed 333 Option Description If the Fn button is pressed while exposure or flash bracketing is active in single frame release mode all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken Bracketing at 5 fps while the shutter release button is pressed If BKT burst white balance bracketing is active or continuous release mode mode CH or CL is selected the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is held down Matrix Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed Center Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn weighted button is pressed go Spot Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed Virtual The electronic analog exposure displays act as a tilt m horizon meter pg 335 The Fn button performs the same function as the P button Choose when using a long lens or in other playback situations in which it is difficult to operate the P button with your left hand Access top Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in MY iteminMy MENU Select this option for quick access to a Menu frequently used menu item None No opera
230. nd 7 fps using Custom Setting d2 Shooting speed pg 321 gt Continuous high speed The maximum frame rate when recording NEF RAW images at a bit depth of 14 bits pg 69 is 1 8 fps or 2 6 fps for DX format Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be 2G stored in the memory buffer at current settings is V 4 shown in the exposure count displays in the IEA _ viewfinder and top control panel while the mam A Fa i shutter release button is pressed The illustration P is s5 aam at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 38 pictures p F5 6 The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 130 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full In rare cases frame rate may also drop when a microdrive memory card is used While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Depending on the number of the images in the buffer recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer
231. nd a multiple exposure will be created from any photographs that have been taken 31 First Steps Charge the Battery The D3X is powered by an EN EL4a rechargeable Li ion battery supplied The EN EL4a is not fully charged at shipment To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 22 quick charger before use About two hours and twenty five minutes are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 Plug the charger in Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and plug the power cable into an electrical outlet All lamps will remain off 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 3 Remove the contact protector Remove the contact protector of the quick charger s battery chambers 32 4 Charge the battery Chamber Contacts r CHARGE oaao CALIBRATION w Insert the battery terminals first aligning the end of the battery with the guide and then sliding the battery in the direction indicated until it clicks into place The chamber lamp and charge lamps will blink while the battery charges Chamber Charge lamps Charge state lamp 50 80 100 Less than 50 of maximum capacity X blinks 3 blinks off off 50 80 of maximum capacity E blinks glows 3 blinks off More than 80 but less than 100 of 2 blinks
232. nd select Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears MacOSX Drag the camera volume NIKON D3X into the Trash NIKON D3X Wireless and Ethernet Networks If the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter is attached photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 available separately The WT 4 can be used in any of the following modes Mode Function Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before select mode upload Control camera from computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network computer Transfer mode PC mode Print mode For more information see the WT 4 user s manual Be sure to update to the latest versions of the WT 4 firmware and supplied software M uss Select MTP PTP for the camera USB option pg 257 before connecting a WT 4 wireless transmitter A WT 4A B C D E The principal difference between the WT 4 and WT 4A B C D E is in the number of channels supported unless otherwise stated all references to the WT 4 also apply to the WT 4A B C D E 261 Printing Photographs Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods e Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG
233. nks blinks exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter 3 Check the number of exposures remaining The top control panel shows the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings When this yl vps MSS ma A s number reaches zero the number of NN exposures remaining frame count and p ee if icon will flash in the top control a panel and a flashing icon will appear in the viewfinder No further pictures can be taken until you delete pictures or insert a new memory card You may be able to take additional pictures at lower image quality or size settings Large Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands rounded ama down to the nearest hundred e g if there is room for approximately 1 260 exposures the oeii emm exposure count display will show 1 2 K 49 50 The Battery Indicator If the segments in the top control panel battery icon blink on and off the camera is calculating the battery charge The battery level will be displayed in about three seconds Auto Meter Off At default settings the shutter speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds auto meter off reducing th
234. o 30 s 30 s e3 Modeling Flash If On the default setting is selected when the camera is being used with an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS pg 186 the flash unit mounted on the camera and any CLS compatible remote flash units will emit a modeling flash when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed pg 113 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected 327 328 e4 Auto Bracketing Set Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing pg 130 is in effect Choose AE amp flash AE the default setting to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only 4 to perform only flash level bracketing or WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing pg 135 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG e5 Auto Bracketing Mode M This option determines which settings are affected when AE amp flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e4 in manual exposure mode Option Description Camera varies shutter speed Custom Setting e4 set to AE only or shutter speed and flash level Custom Setting e4 set to AE amp flash hail Flash speed gt default Camera varies shutter speed and aperture Custom xe Flash speed Setting e4 set to AE only or shutter speed aperture aperture
235. objects could cause burns Using optional flash units close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth Notices e No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permission e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Notice for Customers in Europe e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product e While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately ATTENTION Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Can
236. ol how the camera focuses Autofocus 73 How do take a lot of photographs Release made 86 quickly Can change the frame advance rate Shooting speed 88 321 Can shoot a self portrait Self timer mode 100 Can take pictures under low light Sa without the flash ISO sensitivity 104 Can the ISO sensitivity choose be ISO sensitivity auto 106 adjusted to ensure optimal exposure control How do freeze or blur moving objects Exposure mode 7 116 shutter priority auto How do blur background details or keep eee f both foreground and background in P 118 focus aperture priority auto Question Key phrase See page Can I set both shutter speed and aperture Exposure mode M 120 manually manual Can make photos brighter or darker Exposure compensation 128 How do I make a time exposure Long time exposures 122 Can vary exposure or flash level Exposure and flash f A 131 328 automatically over a series of photos bracketing Can I create multiple copies ofa photo White balance 135 328 using different white balance settings bracketing How do l adjust white balance White balance 140 How do change settings for the optional Fisshimod 194 flash unit How can record multiple shots as a Multiple exposure 206 single photograph Can I record voice memo when taking a Ysice memo 248 photograph Can pick the standard exposure level Fine tune optimal 316 e
237. om Setting e6 Bracketing order pg 330 132 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation see page 128 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing P progress indicator will be displayed in E em Oe i the top control panel and viewfinder A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot EA custom Y EA Exposure increment Exposure increment Exposure increment OEV 1 EV 1 EV 133 134 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero 4 and m is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 204 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated Exposure and Flash Bracketing In single frame and self timer modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after t
238. on pg 72 in the shooting menu voice memos will be associated with the images recorded to the memory card in slot 1 Playback Mode To add a voice memo to the photograph currently displayed in full frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list pg 226 1 Choosea photograph Display or highlight the photograph Only one voice memo can be recorded per image additional voice memos can not be recorded for images already marked with a J icon 2 Press and hold the button A voice memo will be recorded while the amp button is held down note that no voice memo will be recorded if the amp button is not held down for at least one second During Recording During recording the amp icons in the rear nomm WA a w control panel will blink A countdown timer in Gaja A iej 8 the rear control panel shows the length of the Rear control panel voice memo that can be recorded in seconds In playback mode a amp icon is displayed in the monitor during recording 252 Interrupting Recording Recording will end automatically if e The MENU button is pressed to display the menus The E button is pressed e The shutter release button is pressed halfway e The camera is turned off During interval timer photography recording will end automatically about two seconds before the next photograph is taken After Recording If a voice memo has been recorded for the most recen
239. on a television screen Audio Output pg 254 Set HDMI audio video output to play back or record voice memos on the video device Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback pg 288 275 276 High Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type A HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown Connect to camera A i Connect to high definition device 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel Turn the camera on and press P gt button During playback images will be displayed on the high definition television or monitor screen the camera monitor will remain off HDMI pg 348 At the default setting of Auto the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format for the high definition device The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu pg 348 Menu Guide This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus The Playback Menu Managing Images pg 278 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Option pg 290 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings eneee aee E EE pg 302 The Setup Menu Camera Setup cscsssscsssseeseeeee pg
240. onal WT 4 wireless transmitter See Connections Wireless and Ethernet Networks pg 261 Image Authentication Choose whether to embed image authentication information in new photographs as they are taken allowing alterations to be detected using Nikon s optional Image Authentication software Image authentication information can not be embedded in existing photographs Photographs taken with image authentication on are marked with a f8 icon on the file information and overview data pages of the photo information display pp 230 240 Option Description Image authentication information embedded in new N On photographs as they are taken Off Image authentication information not embedded in default new photographs 1 Camera Control Pro 2 Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF RGB photographs recorded directly to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Copies Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created using the options in the retouch menu pg 363 Copyright Information Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken Copyright information is visible on the fourth shooting data page in the photo information display pg 237 and can be viewed using ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 391 e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Artist Enter a photographer name as described
241. only flash level 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the top control panel Number of shots Top control panel BKT button Main command dial Exposure and flash bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a m icon and exposure and flash bracketing indicator will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel 131 3 Select an exposure increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose the exposure increment Exposure increment BKT button Sub command TOP control panel dial At default settings the size of the increment can be chosen from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV The bracketing programs with an increment of 3 EV are listed below Control panel display No of shots Bracketing order EVs nen EE Piciu Baaien 0 0 3 0 3 0 0 7 3 0 3 0 7 0 2 0 0 3 2 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 0 3 5 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 Ge ie cae aia I p 0 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 iF ot ica 0 7 1 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 7 0 3 GFA vovas 9 o See Also For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 314 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Cust
242. oo o a In programmed auto the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to sensitivity ISO equivalency as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 100 200 400 800 1600 4 4 8 5 6 6 7 8 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure i T TL Flash Control When a CLS compatible flash unit is set to TTL the camera automatically selects one of the following types of flash control i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Flash unit emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 1 005 segment RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balan
243. opies or to infringe copyright laws xxiii Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including battery chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal on Nikon Nik PHIN uO IN uo shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following s
244. opying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera 1 Select Load save i Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control C saeit menu highlight Load save N E and press gt R 2 2 Select Copy to camera E Manage Picture Control 10 Load save Highlight Copy to camera and L COPY tO camera press P A errr Copy to card 3 Select a Picture Control Manage Picture Control E Copy to camera Highlight a custom Picture CHOTA Control and either A bie e e press to view current Picture Control settings or ES STANDARD 02 a press to proceed to Step 4 B Sharpening Y Contrast Brightness 1 Saturation Hue GaQGrid Done Confirm 4 Select a destination Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt Manage Picture Control ECT Unused 5 Name the Picture Control Name the Picture Control as described on page 172 The new Picture Control will appear in the Picture Control list and can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu Use Slot 1 Set Picture Control Standard 7 Neutral Vivid Monochrome VIVID 02 L ECA STANDARD 02 GQGrid GAdiust E Manage Picture Control Le Y Save edit Delete amp Load save Slot 1 is used when saving custom Picture Controls to a memory card or copying custom Picture Controls to the camera Cards in slot 2 can not be used
245. or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu y Time stamp APrinter default Print time stamp No time stamp 266 Option Description Menu shown at right will be 7i Comping displayed To exit without cropping picture highlight No cropping and press To crop yam picture highlight Crop and press gt Cropping jf Crop is selected dialog rE shown at right will be displayed Rotate main command dial to right to increase size of crop left to decrease Choose position of crop using multi selector and Scroll OK press Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been Start printing printed press yy Printing Cancel m Selecting Photographs for Printing Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW or TIFF RGB pg 66 can not be selected for printing See Also See page 420 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 267 Printing Multiple Pictures 268 1 Display the PictBridge menu Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 4 on page 264 2 ri fi 100NCD3X DSC_0001 15 12 2008 10 15 00 IDI 2 Choose Print select or a PictBridge Print DPOF Highlight one of the following z Print DPOF options and press P ei e Print select Select pictures for printing e Print DPOF Print an e
246. or cleaning Video mode HDMI AUTO 5 Language En E Image comment OFF 5 Set time zone A time zone selection dialog will be displayed Press lt or gt to highlight the local time zone the UTC field shows the difference between the selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press es World time By Time zone _ Date and time Date format Daylight saving time London Casablanca A UTC 0 01 01 2008 00 00 15 5 Time zone London Casablanca TC 0 01 01 2008 00 00 30 6 Turn daylight saving time on or off Daylight saving time options will be displayed Daylight saving time is off by default if E World time Daylight saving time daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press 7 Set the date and time The dialog shown at right will be displayed Press lt or gt to select an item A or VW to change Press when the clock is set to the current date and time E World time Date and time Y M D 20 P E HMS Set WOK 8 Set date format E World time lt Date format Press A or W to choose the LU YIW D Year month day order in which the year month E or Month dre and day will be displayed and press 68 9 Exitto shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway 73 to exit to shooting mode The Icon If a flashing icon appears
247. or to reduce blurring caused Self timer by camera shake pg 100 Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto Mup or close up photography or in other situations in which the Mirror up _ slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs pg 102 Average frame rate with continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster remaining settings other than Custom Setting d2 pg 321 at default values and memory remaining in memory buff er To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial p 87 iO 88 Continuous Mode To take pictures in CH continuous high speed and Ct continuous low speed modes 1 Select Cu or CL mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to CH or CL Release mode dial 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot While the shutter release button is pressed all the LA way down pictures will be taken at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 Shooting speed pg 321 Continuous High Speed In continuous high speed mode the maximum frame rate for FX 36 x 24 format and 5 4 30 x 24 images is 5 fps The maximum frame rate for DX 24 x 16 format images can be chosen from 5 6 a
248. ore creating an overlay set image quality and size pp 66 70 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press P The dialog shown at right will be displayed with Image 1 highlighted E Image overlay _ Image1 Image2 Preview Y EQZoom Select Display NEF RAW images Press A picture selection dialog will be displayed 5 Image overlay Image 1 oa BY j 4100 1 100 2 EA I Y 100 4 100 5 100 6 E OK Highlight a photograph Press AY 4 lt or P to highlight the first photograph in the overlay To view the highlighted photograph full frame press and hold the H9 button E Image overlay Image 1 aa tad Y l 100 2 Ra o 100 4 100 5 100 6 E WOK 371 4 Select the highlighted F Image overlay photograph F Image 1 Image2 Preview Press to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display Eaton saec The selected image will appear as Image 1 5 Set gain Image overlay Image 1 Image2 Preview Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing A or W to select the gain for image 1 from values between 0 1 and ED Zoom Weelect 2 0 The default value is 1 0 selecting 0 5 cuts gain in half while selecting 2 0 doubles gain The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column 6 S
249. ortrait tall orientation 1 Choose Focus point selection E 4 Assion FUNC button FUNC button dials Select Focus point selection for S SE Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC eP Choose non CPU lens number button gt FUNC button dials z Em Shooting menu bank E to Dynamic AF area Unlock the shutter release Vertical shutter release button button for vertical lock shooting 337 3 Select the focus point With the camera in portrait tall orientation select a focus point by pressing the Fn button and rotating the command dials for vertical shooting Use the main command dial to move the focus area selection left or right the sub command dial to move it up or down Main command dial for vertical shooting Main command dial for vertical shooting Fn button Sub command dial for vertical shooting Fn button Sub command dial for vertical shooting 338 f5 Assign Preview Button Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button either by itself Preview button press or when used in combination with the command dials Preview command dials The options available are the same as for FUNC button press pg 333 and FUNC button dials pg 336 except that the default option for Preview button press is Preview and that Preview command dials lacks a Focus point select
250. ory buffer at ISO 100 Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression ISO sensitivity is set to H 5 3 or higher High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO sensitivity is set to 500 or higher or long exposure noise reduction active D Lighting or image authentication is on 3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly d3 Max Continuous Release pg 321 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 130 429 Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph ISO 100 lens with maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF 50mm f 1 4 D x 2BUAYN YF kK GOOATDA ORK MW D fA no t 4 t2 112 8 4 15 6 18 t11 4 a tne a Q t22 ig e t 32 1 4 4 16 Aperture 30 15 8 4 2 1 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 16 1 3 EV are reduced to 16 1 3 EV 430 Specifications BE Nikon D3X Digital Camera
251. otating the main command dial flexible program Rotate the command dial to the right for large apertures small f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Rotate the command dial to the left for small apertures large f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect an asterisk appears in the top control panel To restore default shutter speed and C AS Main command dial PY tbo F5 AF S REM 77 toon fi evel 7 aperture settings rotate the command dial until the asterisk is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off Shutter speed 2 000 s Shutter speed 1 50 s Aperture f 3 5 Aperture f 22 See Also See page 430 for information on the built in exposure program 115 PN hee 116 5 Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in shutter priority auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode amp Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until is displayed in the ae viewfinder and top Main command dial control panel 5 ie5 F5 6 2 Choose
252. oto information in full frame playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press the center of the multi selector or M Live View When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring in live view select Sub command dial for Aperture setting 342 f8 Release Button to Use Dial This option allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released At the default setting of No the button must be pressed while the command dial is rotated If Yes is selected the setting can be changed by rotating the command dial after the button is released Setting ends when the button is pressed again the shutter release button is pressed halfway or any of the MODE i BKT ISO QUAL or WB button is pressed Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off 343 344 f9 No Memory Card At the default setting of Enable release the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter re
253. p pg 5 LI Warranty T User s Manual this guide I Quick Guide 1 Software Installation Guide LJ Software Suite CD ROM C1 Registration card U S A only Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used IV This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before using the camera Menu items options and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation Microdrive is a trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the United States and other countries HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC PictBridge is a trademark All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders IDX Introduction Tutorial KE Image Recording Options Focus Release Mode EJ ISO Sensitivity Exposure M White Balance Image Enha
254. pg 330 MTR gt under gt over 425 Option Default fl Multi selector center button pg 331 Shooting mode Select center focus point Playback mode Thumbnail on off Live view Select center focus point f N Multi selector pg 332 Do nothing f w Photo info playback pg 332 Info Playback Assign FUNC button pg 333 fA FUNC button press None FUNC button dials Soret Assign preview button pg 339 f5 Preview button press Preview Preview command dials None Assign AE L AF L button pg 340 f6 AE L AF L button press AE AF lock AE L AF L command dials None Customize command dials pg 341 Reverse rotation pg 341 No f7 Change main sub pg 341 Off Aperture setting pg 342 Sub command dial Menus and playback pg 342 Off f8 Release button to use dial pg 343 No f9 No memory card pg 344 Enable release f10 Reverse indicators pg 345 Hehe 426 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 4 GB SanDisk Extreme IV SDCFX4 card at different image quality image size and image area settings EE FX format 36 x 24 Image Area Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity NEF
255. photographs directly from the camera pg 263 e Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot see the printer manual for details If the printer supports DPOF pg 440 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 272 e Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center If the center supports DPOF pg 440 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 272 e Print JPEG photographs on a printer connected to a network computer using the WT 4 wireless transmitter available separately see the WT 4 user s manual for details e Transfer pictures pg 256 and print them from a computer using ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 391 Note that this is the only method available for printing RAW NEF pictures TIFF Photographs TIFF photographs can be printed from a computer Some digital print services may also support TIFF check with the service before ordering 262 Direct USB Connection If the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer via the supplied USB cable selected JPEG pictures can be printed directly from the camera Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set DPOF pg 272 Select MTP PTP in camera USB menu and connect camera to printer pg 264 Print photographs Print multiple Create index prints one ata time photographs pg 265 pg 268
256. play Bracketing flash f Controls 4802 Rename R Reset custom settings pg 304 Custom setting bank pg 304 Custom Setting groups a Autofocus S priority selection mamic AF area Focus tracking with lock on AF activation ON cus point illumination 8 7Focus point wrap around OFF 8 AF point selection AFS1 b Meterina exposure 13 gt 2EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 bSEV steps for exposure comp 1 3 b4 Easy exposure compensation OFF 5 Center weishted area 12 T S6 Fine tune optimal exposure c1 Shutter release button AEL OFF c2 Auto meter off delay Ds C Timers AE lock OFF c2Auto meter off delay 86s c3 Self timer delay _ c4 Monitor off delay a1 Beep 1E 42 Shooting speed a3 Max continuous release 4 File number sequence a d Shooting display g d2Shooting speed 43 Max continuous release 4 File number sequence 45 Control panel viewfinder T 46 Shooting info display 47 LCD illumination E 8 Exposure delay mode gt Bracketing flash fei Flash sync speed L Flash shutter speed 1 60 Modeling flash ON Auto bracketing set W Auto bracketing Mode M Bracketing order N 1 Multi selector center button 2 Multi selector OFF f Controls 3j 2 Multi selector OFF 3 Photo info playback OFF 4 Assign FUNC button q EA 5 Assign preview button a T t6 Assign AEL AFL button 7 Customize command dials t8 Release button to use dial OFF The
257. plays to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and the display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter pg 400 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored but this has no affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If you are using an AC adapter unplug the adapter to prevent fire If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera ina plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case in a plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capa
258. port the Creative Lighting System CLS see page 186 will emit a modeling flash when the depth of field preview button is pressed See page 327 for more information See Also See page 106 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control For information on using the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu for reducing noise at slow shutter speeds see page 300 For information on choosing the size of the increments available for shutter speed and aperture see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 314 For information on changing the roles of the main and sub command dials see Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 341 113 F Programmed Auto In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in programmed auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode F Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until F is displayed in the viewfinder and top Main command dial control panel 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot Shutter speed 1 320 5 Aperture f 9 114 Flexible Program In exposure mode F different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by r
259. r down in My Menu Press to add the new item fs Choose position Image quality s JPEG compression ___ NEF RAW recording m 4 Assign FUNC button Move OROK 5 Add more items The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check mark Items indicated by a N icon can not be selected Repeat steps 1 4 to select additional items pe Additems Shooting menu bank S Reset shooting menu Active folder File naming Slot 2 v Image quality v Image size Image area gt H 377 Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu highlight Remove items and press gt 2 Select items By Remove items Done Y O Image quality O JPEG compression BA O NEF RAW recording gt T O 4Assion FUNC button Highlight items and press to select or deselect Selected items are indicated by a check mark 3 Select Done gt Remove items a Highlight Done and press 2 5 me ae A confirmation dialog will be Hi displayed O t4 Assign FUNC button 4 Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected A 1 Delete selected item Cancel Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the tt button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press f again to remove the selected item from My Menu 378 Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu 1
260. r of GPS device allowing latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC pg 224 and heading to be recorded with photographs length 35 cm 14 in e GPS Unit GP 1 pg 221 Record latitude longitude altitude and UTC time with pictures e Modulite Remote Control Set ML 3 Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8 m 26 ft 393 394 BE Approved Memory Cards The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D3X SanDisk Lexar Media 8 GB eps 8 GB rofessiona Extreme IV SDCFX4 4GB UDMA 300 x 4GB 2 GB 2 GB 8 GB 2 GB 4GB 80 x 1GB Extreme Ill SDCFX3 gt GB Platinum II S12 MB 1GB 60 x 4GB 8 GB 8GB 4GB 4GB Ultra Il SDCFH ic EN RE 133 x WA e 1GB a 1 GB 4GB 2 GB Standard SDCFB 2GB B0xLt MB 1GB Microdrive DSCM 11000 1GB 3K4 2 2 GB 3K4 4 4GB 3K6 6 GB Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period remove the battery and store the battery in a cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that e are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fie
261. r use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted in the camera before they can be used for recording or playback Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card Do not expose to water high levels of humidity or direct sunlight Formatting Memory Cards Memory cards must be formatted before first use Format the card as described below vV Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding pg 256 1 Turn the camera on Power switch 2 Press the a buttons ft button Hold the mm MODE and it buttons down simultaneously for more than two seconds A blinking Far will appear in the shutter speed displays in t
262. ra body Filters can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4 ED is mounted on camera If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data pg 218 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and top control panel Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 218 Use spot or center weighted metering if desired results are not achieved For improved precision specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens data pg 218 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than 1 125 s Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens In manual exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens Exposure compensation required when used with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring PB 6D may be required depending on camera orientation Use preset aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph e PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA 4 Camera Holder 383 384 m Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following accessories and non CPU
263. ra File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif 2 21 Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage e FX format Approx 100 horizontal and 100 vertical e DX format Approx 97 horizontal and 97 vertical e 5 4 Approx 97 horizontal and 100 vertical Magnification Approx 0 7 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 18 mm 1 0 m7 Diopter adjustment 3 1 m Focusing screen Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte VI screen Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera F and amp modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled Lens Compatible lenses e DX AF Nikkor All functions supported e Type Gor D AF Nikkor All functions supported PC Micro Nikkor does not support some functions IX Nikkor lenses not supported e Other AF Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering Il Lenses for F3AF not supported e Al P Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II e Non CPU Can be used in exposure modes Ff and M electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f 5 6 or faster color matrix metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data Al lenses only
264. re at the selected value press the Mf button and rotate the sub command dial until IN icons appear in the viewfinder and the top control panel button Sub command dial To unlock aperture press the Mf button and rotate the sub command dial until the icons disappear from the displays 124 Autoexposure AE Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure 1 Select center weighted or metering selector spot metering pg 110 Matrix metering will not produce the desired results with autoexposure lock If using center weighted metering select the center focus point with the multi selector pg 78 2 Lock exposure Shutter release o ae button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the AE L AF L button to lock exposure and focus except in manual focus mode Confirm that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder AE L AF L button While exposure lock is in effect an AE L KORTENIE indicator will appear in the viewfinder 125 126 3 Recompose the photograph Keeping the AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot Metered Area In spot metering exposure will be locked at the va
265. ress the t button Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters long Any characters after the 19th will be deleted After entering the name press The Set Picture Control new Picture Control will appear in the c Es Standard Picture Control list IC Monochrome Fact V1V1D 02 ro e EA GAdiust Custom Picture Controls can be renamed PErTEAE at any time using the Rename optionin the Manage Picture Control menu Savel iit Load save Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are not affected by Reset shooting menu pg 293 Custom Picture Controls do not have a Quick adjust option pg 167 Custom Picture Controls based on Monochrome have Filter effects and Toning options in place of Saturation and Hue controls The Original Picture Control Icon The Nikon Picture Control on which the custom Original Picture Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon Control icon in the top right corner of the edit display gt VIVID 02 a s Contrast Brightness z Saturation Hue E EDGrid ONOK Reset 173 174 Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software BE C
266. restore shooting menu Reset shooting menu 293 defaults How do I restore Custom Setting Reset custom settings 304 defaults How do I change the self timer delay Self timer delay 319 Can reverse the electronic analog Reverse indicators 345 exposure display Can display the menus in a different tangtage 349 language Can I save menu settings for use on a A different D3X camera Save load settings 358 EE Menus and Displays Question Key phrase See page How do I get more information on a Help 31 menu How do I use the menus Using the menus 26 What do these indicators mean Viewfinder control 8 10 What information is in the shooting panels shooting 12 14 information display information display 6 What does this warning mean Error messages and 414 displays How much charge does the battery have Battery level 48 left How do I get more information about the Battery info 355 battery vi Question Key phrase See page How do keep the file number from being reset when insert a new memory File nuimber seq ence 322 card How do I reset file numbering to 1 How do I clean the camera or lens Cleaning the camera 395 H Taking Photographs Question Key phrase See page How many more shots can take with this Number of exposures 49 card remaining How do take bigger photographs How can I get more photos on the Image quality and size 66 70 memory card Can I contr
267. roduce the greatest contrast Contrast detect autofocus takes longer than phase detection autofocus Hand Held Mode A 1 Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Ly Release mode dial 2 Adjust Live view options in the shooting menu Oy Select Live view inthe shooting menu emm and choose Hand held for Live view 1G Live view mode mode 5 EE Hand held E amp Tripod The Live view menu also contains a E Live view Release mode option where you can 1c Release mode choose from single frame and oT continuous release modes pg 86 c Continuous low speed Cu Continuous high speed 3 Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor instead of the viewfinder for improved focus focus on your subject by pressing the shutter release button halfway then press it the rest of the way down to start live view To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU 91 m 92 4 Framea picture in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 x press the mQ button while rotating the main command dial zel ER button Main command dial While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window
268. rs they will be charged in the order inserted If the calibration button for the first battery is pressed the second battery can not be calibrated or charged until calibration and charging of the first battery are complete MH 22 quick charger Rated input AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Rated output DC 12 6 V 1 200 mA Supported batteries Nikon EN EL4a EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries Charging time per Approx 2 hours and 25 minutes EN EL4a or 1 hour battery and 40 minutes EN EL4 when battery is fully discharged Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 160 x 85 x 50 5 mm 6 3 x 3 3 x 2 0 in Length of cord Approx 1800 mm 5 ft 11 in Weight Approx 260 g 9 1 oz excluding power cable EN EL4a rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 11 1 V 2 500 mAh Dimensions W x H x D Approx 56 5 x 27 x 82 5 mm 2 2 x 1 1 x 3 2 in Weight Approx 180 g 6 3 oz excluding terminal cover 439 440 Supported Standards DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File System DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card Exif version 2 21 The c
269. s i OFF After delete T Rotate tall OFF 6 Display options ma mage review Press gt to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option Press A or to highlight an option 29 30 8 select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button button PLAYBACK MENU Delete fi Playback folder NCD3X Hide image BS __ Display mode FS EA Copy image s as i ON After delete T Rotate tall OFF Note the following points e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway pg 56 Help If a icon is displayed at the bottom left SHOOTING MENU corner of the monitor help canbe displayed CES enu Z Vignette control by pressing the O n button A Y description of the currently selected option Nise or menu will be displayed while the button Multiple exposure is pressed Press A or W to scroll through See the display O n button Multiple exposure Record the specified number of shots as a single image If no operations are performed for 30 s shooting will end a
270. s 345 RGB color space 184 RGB histogram 232 282 Rotate tall 287 S S single point AF 76 S single servo AF 74 80 S small 70 Save load settings 358 Saving camera settings 358 Self timer delay 319 Sensitivity 103 Set Picture Control 164 Monochrome 164 Filter effects 167 169 Toning 167 169 Neutral 164 Standard 164 Vivid 164 Setup menu 346 Shooting data 234 235 236 237 Shooting info display 324 Shooting menu 290 Shooting menu bank 291 Shooting speed 321 Shutter speed 116 123 auto FP high speed sync 186 194 326 flash sync speed 194 326 lock 123 Shutter priority auto 116 Shutter release button 3 56 Shutter release button AE L 318 Side by side comparison 374 Single point AF 76 Size 70 Slide show 288 Frame interval 288 Slide show 288 Slot 2 72 296 Backup 72 Overflow 72 RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 72 Slot selection 156 228 279 364 Slow sync 194 Speedlight 186 Spot 110 317 T Television 274 Ten pin remote terminal 4 221 392 Thumbnail 241 331 TIFF RGB 66 Time 40 349 Time exposure 392 Timer 100 211 Trim 368 Two button reset 204 U USB 257 352 Mass Storage 257 352 MTP PTP 257 352 USB 256 352 cable i 256 V Vertical AF ON button 313 Vertical shutter release button lock 337 Video 274 348 Video mode 348 Viewfinder xviii 6 7 12 47 388 389 407 eyepiece 47 100 213
271. s If the camera is able to focus using contrast detect autofocus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red I Contrast Detect Autofocus The camera will not continue to adjust focus while an AF ON button is pressed in continuous servo autofocus mode In both single servo and continuous servo autofocus modes the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in focus Manual focus focus mode M pg 83 Use zoom for precise focus 95 m 96 To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 x and check focus press the MR button while rotating the main command dial ER button Main command dial While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor To preview exposure at current settings press In exposure modes other than M exposure can be adjusted by pressing the E4 button and rotating the main command dial note that while exposure compensation can be adjusted by 5 EV only values between 3 and 3 EV can be previewed in the monitor Exposure Preview Matrix metering is used to set exposure Exposure can not be previewed when an optional flash unit is attached bracketing is in effect pg 130 active D lighting is on pg 181 or
272. s Set camera clock 40 not correct Some options are not available at Men itemean rotbe certain combinations of settings Note that Battery info option is not available 355 selected when camera is powered by optional EH 6 AC adapter 413 414 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder top control panel and monitor Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page Lens aperture ringis Set ring to minimum FEE ne gt not set to minimum aperture largest 38 blinks aperture f number lt a ca Low battery Ready a fully charged 48 spare battery Ca CA blinks blinks Battery exhausted Replace battery 32 34 Contact Nikon lt 1 a Battery can not be A authorized service blinks blinks used representative Camera clock is not set Set camera clock 40 blinks No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without specifying Aperture value will be AF maximum aperture displayed if maximum 218 Aperture shown in aperture is specified stops from maximum aperture gt lt Camera unable to focus blinks using autofocus Focus manually 83 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page e Use a lower ISO 104 sensitivity e UseoptionalNDfilter 390 Subject too bright In exposure mode Hi photo will be 5 Increase
273. s display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected In exposure modes other than manual close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure pg 100 Some noise may be audible when zoom lenses are zoomed in or out or shutter speed is changed in exposure mode P or 5 To reduce blur in tripod mode choose On for Custom Setting d8 Exposure delay mode pg 325 If a CPU lens with an aperture ring is attached and Aperture ring selected for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting pp 341 342 live view will not start and the shutter release will be disabled Select Sub command dial when using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring The Shooting Information Display To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode press the MA button Shooting information display off Shooting info histogram 2 Framing guides 2 1 Only displayed during exposure preview tripod mode pg 96 2 Not displayed when view through lens is zoomed in Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the button while the view through the monitor is displayed Press A or W to adjust brightness note that monitor brightness has no effect on pictures taken in live view mode To return to live view release the button Monitor brightness can not be adjusted during exposur
274. s is attached area can be selected using Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 316 Classic meter for portraits 2 Center weight area 3 Spot Camera meters circle 4 mm 0 16 in in diameter approximately 1 5 of frame Circle is centered on current a focus point making it possible to ae I meter off center subjects if non CPU lens is used or if auto area AF is in effect pg 76 camera will meter center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker Spot metering area 1 When non CPU lens is attached average for entire frame will be used if Average is selected for Custom Setting b5 otherwise center weighted metering for non CPU lenses will use 12 mm circle in center of viewfinder regardless of setting selected for Non CPU lens data 2 For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in Non CPU lens data menu pg 218 3 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder 110 To choose a metering method Metering selector press the metering selector lock button and rotate the metering selector until the desired mode is displayed 3D Color Matrix Il Metering In matrix metering exposure is set using a 1005 segment RGB sensor Use a type G or D lens for results that include range information 3D color matrix metering I
275. s not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted I The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction 13 The Shooting Information Display Shooting information including shutter speed aperture the number of exposures remaining and AF area mode is displayed in the monitor when the M button is pressed To clear shooting information from the monitor press the W button again or press the shutter release button halfway At default settings the monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 20 seconds info button felch al aR 15 lea SHOOT EA id Mn aal enal p 17 18 19 20 2 Bai Sn RS UNE SORTS S REAR t i alaa 33 mam AF S TE 22 37 ma I AEE poo 28 AUTO E F East 29 5 fps at ISIN M2 pe eh 3O s 35 34 33 32 31 See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 319 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting information display see Custom Setting d6 Shooting info display pg 324 14 PWN nN A WU o 10 11 12 13 14 15
276. s provided with a cap which protects the contacts when the terminal is not in use The following accessories can be used all lengths are approximate e Remote Cord MC 22 Remote shutter release with blue yellow and black terminals for connection to a remote shutter triggering device allowing control via sound or electronic signals length 1 m 3 ft 3 in e Remote Cord MC 30 Remote shutter release can be used to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure length 80 cm 2 ft 7 in Remote Cord MC 36 Remote shutter release can be used for interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure Equipped with back lit control panel shutter release lock for use in bulb photography and timer that beeps at one second intervals length 85 cm 2 ft 9 in Extension Cord MC 21 Can be connected to ML 3 or MC series 20 22 23 25 30 or 36 Only one MC 21 can be used at a time length 3 m 9 ft 10 in Connecting Cord MC 23 Connects two cameras for simultaneous operation length 40 cm 1 ft 4 in Remote terminal accessories Adapter Cord MC 25 Ten pin to two pin adapter cord for connection to devices with two pin terminals including the MW 2 radio control set MT 2 intervalometer and ML 2 modulite control set length 20 cm 8 in e GPS Adapter Cord MC 35 pg 221 Connects GPS devices to D3X via PC cable supplied by manufacture
277. se button lock ju 54 2 Sub command dial 7 CPU contacts 3 Fn Dutton 64 199 333 8 Mounting index eeceeen 37 4 Sub command dial for 9 LENS MOUNK ce eesesessesseeseesees 84 Vertical SHOOTING sssssessecesseeees 16 10 Tripod socket 5 Shutter release button for Vertical SHOOTING sseseccseeceseees 54 BE Attaching the Camera Strap Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as shown below Camera Body Continued 11 12 1 Viewfinder eyepiece 47 2 Eyepiece shutter lever 47 3 t delete button 58 245 nim format DUTTON ecsesseseees 45 4 gt playback button 57 226 5 MOMitOr eee 57 90 226 6 MENU menu button 26 277 7 E thumbnail playback ZOOM button uu 242 243 8 Om protect button help button BB info DUTTON ssssss000000000000001 M The Speaker and Microphone 13 14 15 9 OK DUTTON essseessssessseesssees 28 10 Speaker ssseoessssseocsesssvoesesssseese 254 11 Rear control panel 10 323 12 1S0 ISO sensitivity button 104 Two button reset button 204 13 QUAL image quality size 14 WB white balance DUTTON veces 141 146 147 Two button reset button 204 15 Microphone essesscsssesccssseessseees 248 Do not bring magnetic devices such as microdrive cards close
278. sed again stop Recording will end automatically after 60 s ec ie Voice Memo The option selected for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear control panel HORM ry NORM wel REC A Iso Ar E Iso A ig JPEG an ig Ht JPEG Ly On auto and manual Manual only 249 250 Automatic Recording Shooting Mode If On Auto and manual is selected for Voice memo pg 248 a voice memo will be added to the most recent photograph when shooting ends Recording will end when the amp button is pressed or after the specified recording time has ended Manual Recording Shooting Mode If On Auto and manual or Manual only is zZ selected for Voice memo pg 248 a voice memo can be recorded for the most recent A photograph by pressing and holding the amp TPA 2 button A voice memo will be recorded while the button is held down note that no voice memo will be recorded if the button is not held down for at least one second button M Automatic Recording Voice memos will not be recorded automatically if On is selected for the Image review option pg 287 in the playback menu A voice memo can however be added to the photograph displayed during image review even if Off is selected for the Voice memo option in the setup menu M slot 2 If two memory cards are inserted and Backup or RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 is selected for the Slot 2 opti
279. sed algorithm reducing file size by about 20 40 default with no effect on image quality ON Compressed NEF images are compressed using a non reversible algorithm reducing file size by about 40 55 with almost no effect on image quality Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu NEF RAW Bit Depth The NEF RAW recording gt NEF RAW bit depth item in the shooting menu offers the following bit depth options for NEF RAW images Option Description 12 bit A 12 bit default NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits 14bit 14 bit producing files larger than 12 bit files but increasing the color data recorded 69 Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from Large the default option Medium or Small note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image areal pg 60 Image area Option Size pixels Print size cm in L 6 048 x 4 032 76 8 x 51 2 30 2 x 20 2 oe M 4 544 x 3 024 57 7 38 4 22 7x15 1 i S 3 024 x 2 016 38 4 x 25 6 15 1 x 10 1 L 3 968 x 2 640 50 4 x 33 5 19 8 x 13 2 o f F M 2 976 x 1 976 37 8 x 25 1 14 9x 9 9 S 1 984 x 1 320 25 2 x 16 8 9 9x 6 6 L 5 056 x 4 032 64 2 x 51 2 25 3 x 20 2 5 4 30 x 24 M 3 792 x 3 024 48 2 x 38 4 19 0 x 15 1 S 2 528 x 2 016 32 1 x 25 6 12 6
280. seecsneeste pg 45 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS cccsssecsssccsssccnssecssteccssccessecsnecessecensecesees pg 47 Basic Photography and Playback ssscssscsssssscseees pg 48 Tunnithe Camera Oee enea e ae Ae E E cee emer pg 48 Adjust Camera Settings ereere ieee Aee AA E A A pg 51 Ee PARAE N E A OO pg 54 FOCUS ENE INOA E eE E E A AE pg 55 Viewing PhotographS ssssssssessssssesssssessesseesssssessroeeeesesesssssseeeensesss pg 57 Deleting Unwanted Photographs ssssssssssssessssesssssssseoeeeeesss pg 58 25 26 Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options MENU button can be accessed from the camera menus To view the menus press the MENU button Tabs Choose from playback shooting Custom Settings setup retouch and My menus see following page Slider shows position in current menu Current settings are shown by Menu options Options in current menu 9 If 2 icon is displayed help for current item can be viewed by pressing O n button pg 31 BE Menus The following menus are available Menu Description Playback So playback settings and manage photos pg Shooting Adjust shooting settings pg 290 Custom Settings Personalize camera settings pg 302 Format memory cards and perform basic camera Y Setup setup pg 346 Create retouched copies of existing photographs Ki
281. seee 60 6 Altitude 11 Folder number frame NUMDE Bun esseessssessseesssssssseesseeees 293 1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken pg 221 2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass 3 Displayed in yellow if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 238 HE Overview Data 1 Frame number total number of frames 2 VOICE MEMO ICON eeseeseeeee 248 3 Protect status oe essecsesseeceees 244 4 Camera name 5 Retouch indicator 363 6 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image pg 233 Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness vertical axis shows number of pixels of each brightness in image 7 IS sensitivity esses 104 8 Focal length 386 9 GPS data indicator 221 10 Image comment indicator 350 11 Flash Mode wu eesssssssescseenseesees 194 12 Flash compensation 13 Exposure compensation 128 14 Metering Method eee 110 15 Exposure MOE esessssssseeeeees 112 16 Shutter speed eee 116 120 D7 Aperture cessaesssssssesseeee 118 120 1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on ER 239 240 OONCD3 DSC_0001 JPG JA i 5 00 26 25 2423 22 21 18 Picture CONtrOl nese 26 Folder NaMe ssesscsssssesseeeseeees 19 Active D L
282. seenee 2 Protect status 244 9 Focus mode 3 Retouch indicator esses 363 Lens VR 4 Metering method 110 vibration reduction 382 Shutter speed s s 116 120 10 Flash Mode sssssssssssssrsssrsessssseseses 194 ApErtUrE ecsssssssesssessesesee 118 120 Flash compensation 5 5 Exposure Mode ssssssssssssseessss 112 Commander mode ISO sensitivity 2 11 Camera name 6 Exposure compensation 128 12 Image area 60 Optimal exposure tuning 316 13 Folder number frame Z Focal length sssssssssvessessesrssrseesee 386 NUM EL sssssssssssssssssesseesssrsserssersse 293 a 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 282 2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on 3 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method 4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached 5 Displayed only if optional flash unit SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 is used 6 Displayed in yellow if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 234 BE Shooting Data Page 2 nn 4 Tr mi HITE BALANCE 3 5 T COUN Adol 6 mis CTRL STANDARD 7 rym QUICK ADJUST 0 8 E SHARPENING 9 T CONTRAST 10 E BRIGHTNESS 11 rig SATURATION 12 HUE aly 13 14 15 1 Voice MEMO ICON esssessssees 8 Sharpening un eseeessccss
283. seesceenseeees 167 2 Protect status sas 9 Contrast 3 Retouch indicator 10 Brightness 4 White balance uu 11 Saturation 4 167 Color temperature 147 Filter effects 9 ssssscccsssescseesees 167 White balance fine tuning 143 12 Hue 4 cssssssussesateetiaeiesan 167 Preset manual sssssssssssssssessessesse 148 BRR TONIN Fo secssssorssessoresemessnsee 167 5 Color space sneanscoeanessccnsensscoessessees 183 13 Camera name 6 Picture COntrol ssssssssssssssesrssses 162 14 Image area vecesssesssasesseessssuee 60 7 Quick adjust 15 Folder number frame Original Picture Control 173 number cccsessssecscsssssecesnssseeeee 293 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 282 B Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls Monochrome Picture Controls only Displayed in yellow if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu Au BWN 235 A BE Shooting Data Page 3 j 2 3 E fox JE 4 5 DO Nae 5 A 6 E VIGNETTE CTRL NORMAL 7 RETOUCH 8 1 Voice MEMO ICON 2 Protect status 3 Retouch indicator 4 High ISO noise reduction 300 Long exposure noise reduction sssssssssssssssessssereersssssesee 300 5 Active D Lighting HI ISO LONG EXP NORMAL D LIG
284. ses for 35mm 135 format cameras If Auto DX crop is on the default setting and a 35mm format lens is attached the picture angle will be the same as a frame of 35mm film 35 9 x 24 0 mm if a DX lens is attached the picture angle will automatically be adjusted to 23 6 x 15 7 mm DX format To choose a picture angle different from that of the current lens turn Auto DX crop off and select from FX format 36 x 24 DX format 24 x 16 and 5 4 30 x 24 If a 35mm format lens is attached the picture angle could be reduced by 1 5 x by selecting DX format 24 x 16 exposing a smaller area or the aspect ratio could be changed by selecting 5 4 30 x 24 FX format 36 x 24 picture size 35 9 x 24 0 mm equivalent to 35mm format camera Picture diagonal DX format 24 x 16 picture size 23 6 x 15 7 mm equivalent to DX format camera 5 4 30 x 24 picture size 30 0 x 24 0 mm Picture angle FX format 36 x 24 35mm format Picture angle DX format 24 x 16 DX format Picture angle 5 4 30 x 24 The DX format 24 x 16 picture angle is about 1 5 times smaller than the 35mm format picture angle while the 5 4 30 x 24 picture angle is about 1 1 times smaller To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when DX format 24 x 16 is selected multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1 5 or by about 1 1 when 5 4 30 x 24 is selected
285. sh ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level Flash output will be locked at this level 12 and FV lock icons mema and will d F56 appear in the top control panel and E l viewfinder 6 Recompose the photograph 7 Take the photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock 199 8 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV lock icons mama and Em are no longer displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder Metering The metering areas for FV lock are as follows Speedlight Flash mode Metered area i TTL 5 mm circle in center of frame Stand alone flash unit AA Area metered by flash exposure meter Used with other flash at sume units Advanced A master Area metered by flash exposure Wireless Lighting flash meter See Also For information on using the depth of field preview or AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button pg 339 or Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 340 200 Flash Contacts The camera is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows flash units to be connected via a sync cable When an
286. shutter 116 overexposed speed A Choose a smaller 118 aperture larger f number 415 416 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page e Use a higher ISO 104 sensitivity e Use optional flash In 187 n l exposure mode vo Saleoecereonare Slowershuter 116 speed A Choose a larger 118 aperture smaller f number huki bu ih selected in Ieee as aa blinks exposure mode amp exposure mode Optional flash unit that 4 4 does not support i TTL B oe 191 blinks flash control attached y blinks and set to TTL flashunit If indicator blinks for 3s ie phote m after flash fires photo monitor if 191 blinks may be underexposed underexposed adjust settings and try again Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page Flash unit that does not Change flash sync support red eye mode or use flash unit blink reduction attached and Aat ebro red eve 189 blinks flash sync mode set to PP y reduction red eye reduction Memory insufficient to Reduce quality or 66 70 fi record further photos size u we y 2 at current settings or Delete photographs 281 blinks blinks camera has run out of Insert new memory 42 file or folder numbers card Release shutter If error E persists or appears blinks Camera malfunction frequently consult Nikon authorized serv
287. shutter release button is pressed 323 d6 Shooting Info Display At the default setting of Auto AUTO the color of the lettering in the information display pg 14 will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color P_ieS 55 A FS PAAA i e216 884 i Je ON ISONEN ms Dark on light Light on dark 324 d7 LCD Illumination At the default setting of Off the control panel backlights LCD illuminators will only light while the power switch is rotated toward 8 If On is selected the control panels will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active pg 50 Select Off for increased battery life d8 Exposure Delay Mode At the default setting of Off shutter is released when the shutter release button is pressed When shooting with Tripod selected in live view mode pg 94 or in situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures On can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter release button is pressed and the mirror is raised 325 e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Auto F
288. shutter speed is set to tus L a or x 250 flash sync speed Remote Cords If the shutter release button on a remote cord available separately see pg 392 is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode it will activate contrast detect autofocus If the remote cord shutter release button is pressed all the way down without focusing focus will not be adjusted before the picture is taken 7 Take the picture Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed p m Focusing with Contrast Detect Autofocus Contrast detect autofocus will take longer than normal phase detection autofocus In the following situations the camera may be unable to focus using contrast detect autofocus e The camera is not mounted on a tripod e The subject contains lines parallel to the long edges of the frame e The subject lacks contrast e The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness e Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent mercury vapor sodium vapor or similar lighting e Across star filter or other special filter is used e The subject appears smaller than the focus point e The subject is do
289. ssing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing AE L AF L button Flash Flash control e TTL i TTL balanced fill flash and standard i TTL flash for digital SLR using combined 1 005 segment RGB sensor are available with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 e Auto aperture Available with SB 900 or SB 800 and CPU lens Non TTL auto Supported flash units include SB 900 SB 800 SB 28 SB 27 and SB 22s e Distance priority manual Available with SB 900 and SB 800 Flash mode Front curtain sync slow sync rear curtain sync red eye reduction red eye reduction with slow sync Flash Flash ready indicator Lights when Speedlight such as SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 80DX SB 28DX or SB 50DX is fully charged blinks after flash is fired at full output Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB 900 System CLS SB 800 or SU 800 as commander and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units Sync terminal ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread White balance White balance Auto TTL white balance with main ima
290. ssssssccssccssssesssecsssccssccessccesscecsucessuseesnceesseeessceesees 148 Image Enhancement 161 Picture CONTPOIS ceecsessssssccsscesstscsseecssccssccessccesscecsueecsnceesnecesseeessceesees 162 Creating Custom Picture ControlS sssssssssssssrsssssereesssssrssese 170 Active D LigN NG ssiri 181 COOLS PACE siiis iaiia 183 Flash Photography 185 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS ssssssssssssssssssssssssss 186 Compatible Flash Units ssssssssesssssessssssssssssrssesssssssssssssreseessessssssese 187 CLS Compatible Flash Units ssss sssssssssssssssssressssserresssssrreessssreee 187 Other Flash Units cesssssscssssccssecccsssecsssseccsscesesssecesneessnseesssees 191 I TTL Flash COntrol ccssecsssssssssssecsssssessessssesssesssesssessseesnccsseesneesseessees 193 Flash MOCeS ccssssssssssssssscssssssscsssecsncsssessnssssecsnccsseesncsnseesncsnseeseessseeseens 194 xii FEV LOCK EER E EEE EE REE E EAE 198 Plash COMTACS scssccesisscessscacesiiadendsetenstiacesbdsacesldacen sd ecsaduecarda centaeccnsaeec 201 Other Shooting Options 203 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings u s 204 Multiple ExPOSULe sscssscssscccssccsssscsseccescccescessseecssccesnccsseessneecsnseesees 206 Interval Timer Photography escsessccssssecsnssscessecessseecsnseeeesseeees 211 NOM CPU LGMSES seissscccsstsicasssaccessdesdensessssczecsusserdecsbscrsicetsoniecsvostscreasbets 218 USING 2 GPS UNIT oe essssssesssessse
291. sssssssesssssssesssssssessssssseessssssesssesees 221 More About Playback 225 Full Frame Playback 0 sssssssssscsssseessssecessssecsnssecssssecessseessnsnecesseeees 226 Photo Information essssccssssecsnssecsssseccsnsseesnssecesssecesnseessnsneeesseeees 229 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback 0 eee 241 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM sssssssssssssccseesecsseeeesees 243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion seccssssscessseescnsees 244 Deleting Individual Photographs qu ssssssssessseecsneeesecnsesenseess 245 Voice Memos 247 Recording VOICE MEMOS cssesecssssecesssecessssecssssecessseeesnseessnsnecesnneess 248 Playing Voice M MOS ssesscssssecssssscessssecssssecssssecessseecsnseecesnsecesnneees 253 Connections 255 CONNECTING TO A COMPUTE eesesssessseesseseesseesseesssesseesseessesssess 256 Direct USB Connection essssssesesssuseossossuooecesunsorossuusooosousooosssssse 258 Wireless and Ethernet Networks uu ssssssssssccsssssseeesssseceeennees 261 Printing PHOtograpls ssssssccsssccssseecssssecessseecssseecssseesesseeesnseees Direct USB CONNECTION eessessssssecsssstesesseesssstecsssesssssseesssnsessss Viewing Photographs ON TV ssssescsssescsseesessseeeesssecesseessnsneeessees Standard Definition Devices High Definition Devices sssscsssssccsseecssseescsneecsssseccsseessseteesee xiii Menu Guide 277 The Playback Menu Managing IMages ssssscssssccseeeeeees 2
292. sssssssseeseee 48 11 Shutter release button 55 56 12 E4 exposure compensation DuttON siiicar 128 13 Eyelet for camera Strap 5 14 MODE exposure mode DUIECOM sisi disietecselsccorerpsiacscsassiceees 113 ni format DUtTON A 45 15 Top control panel uu esses 8 16 Diopter adjustment knob 47 17 Accessory shoe for optional flash unit 18 Accessory shoe cover ssndausadssunsnseonandaadbanidesdenen 22 201 405 Camera Body Continued 1 MiO ee ecessesesessseeeee 90 102 400 2 Self timer lamp scseecceeeeee 101 3 Flash sync terminal cover 201 4 Ten pin remote terminal COVED wiscessessssssssesesessssesessssers 221 392 5 Flash sync terminal 201 6 Ten pin remote terminal wuss 221 392 7 USB connector cover 258 264 8 Lens release button 38 9 Connector Cover 274 276 BAN AIV OUT ace Homi 10 USB connector 258 264 11 DC IN connector for optional AC adapter EH 6 387 12 Audio video A V CONNECTOT eesseecssccssensscsseeseensees 274 13 HDMI CONNECHOT ee eeseeeseeeee 276 14 Focus mode selector 74 83 15 Battery cover latch 34 16 Battery chamber covet 34 17 Meter coupling lever 433 18 Body CaP eeeessseseccssssccsssescssteeesnsees 391 1 Depth of field preview 6 Vertical shooting shutter button woeececseesseessesssesseesseees relea
293. sure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 6 AC adapter available separately Before connecting the camera select the i USB USB option in the camera setup menu pg 352 and choose a USB option from ease Mass Storage MTP PTP default and Mass Storage as AEM OO described below Operating system Nikon Transfer Camera Control Pro 2 e Windows Vista Service Pack 1 32 bit Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate editions Choose Choose x MTP PTP or e Windows XP Service Pack 3 Mass Storage MTP PTP Home Edition Professional Mac 0S X version 10 3 9 10 4 11 or 10 5 5 See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on supported operating systems 257 258 Direct USB Connection Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Select a USB option Before connecting the camera to the computer make sure the correct option is selected for the USB item in the camera setup menu pg 257 2 Turn the camera off Power switch m D T TA 3 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up 4 connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle
294. t pg ik 328 2 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the top control panel Number of shots BKT button Main command gt WB bracketing dial apt indicator At settings other than zero a WB a a bracketing indicator will appear in the top control panel and a m icon will be displayed in the top and rear control panels 135 136 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose the white balance adjustment Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired White balance increment H so BKT button Sub command Top control panel dial Choose from increments of 1 5 mired 2 10 mired or 3 15 mired Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue higher A values to increased amounts of amber pg 144 The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below No of White balance Control panel display shots increment Bracketing order EVs ne 4 ere cree 0 1 0 HJF 3 TET paperen H 3 1B 1B 0 2B AJE nE A qiere r 3 1A 1A 2A 0 Lee fag Ssananwan 2 1B 0 1B APF nE aiaia fit H 2 1A O 1A FF eer ares t 3 1A 1B 0 1A 1B DE esenee H 5 1A 1B 0 2A 1A 1
295. t 10 325 Battery xviii xix 32 36 406 Battery info 355 Beep 320 Body cap 4 37 391 Bracketing 130 328 329 exposure 130 328 flash 130 328 white balance 130 135 328 Bracketing order 330 Bulb 122 Burst 89 321 334 c C 74 305 Calibrating 437 calibration 355 437 charging 32 info 355 Camera Control Pro 2 256 391 Capture NX 2 66 353 391 Center weighted 110 316 317 Center weighted area 316 Clock 40 41 CLS 186 Color balance 370 Color space 183 Adobe RGB 183 SRGB 183 Color space 183 240 Color temperature 140 142 147 CompactFlash 42 Computer 256 Control panel 8 11 Control panel viewfinder 323 Copy image s 283 Copying images 283 Copyright 237 357 Copyright information 357 CPU contacts 384 CPU lens 38 384 Creative Lighting System 186 Crop 267 368 Custom setting bank 304 Custom Settings 302 Custom Settings Menu 302 Customize command dials 341 D Date and time 40 349 Daylight saving time 40 349 DCF version 2 0 440 Default settings 204 422 restoring 204 Delete 281 All 281 Selected 281 Delete 58 245 281 all images 281 current image 245 selected images 281 Digital Print Order Format 262 440 Diopter 3 47 389 adjustment control 47 adjustment lens 389 Display mode 282 D Lighting 366 DPOF 262 Dust off ref photo 353 Dynamic AF area 307 51 points 3D tracking 308 Dynamic area AF 76
296. t 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu BE Highlights 1 Voice Memo ICON esses 248 5 Image highlights 2 0 282 2 Protect status cececsecsssseesseeee 244 6 Folder number frame 3 Retouch indicator Percetakan 363 number 2 s abesssseneesedecansesesscancdes cance 293 4 Highlight display indicator 282 7 Current channel 1 Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode pg 282 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights areas that may be overexposed for current channel Press lt or while pressing MS button to cycle through channels as follows RGB R G B all channels red green blue 3 Displayed in yellow if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 E was CE selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 231 BE RGB Histogram 1 Voice MEMO ICON sessesseeseeee 248 6 Histogram RGB channel In all 244 histograms horizontal axis gives 2 Protect status wo sees pixel brightness vertical axis 3 Retouch indicator 363 ae number of pixels 4 Image highlights 2 282 7 Current channel 5 Folder number frame 8 Hi dd 14 NUMDEL PB wun ceesssssseesssseccssseecssneesees 293 istogram red channel 9 Histogram green channel 4 10 Histogram blue channel 4 1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode pg 282
297. t photograph a icon will be displayed in the rear control panel Rear control panel If a voice memo exists for the photograph currently selected in playback mode a X icon will be displayed in the monitor Voice Memo File Names Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form xxxxnnnn WAV where xxxxnnnn is a file name copied from the image with which the voice memo is associated For example the voice memo for the image DSC_0002 JPG would have the file name DSC_0002 WAV Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer Playing Voice Memos Voice memos can be played back over the camera s built in speaker when the associated image is viewed in full frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list pp 226 242 The presence of a voice memo is indicated by an 4 icon fi 100NCD3X DSC_0001 JP NORMAL 15 12 2008 10 15 00 6048x4032 To Press Description Statina Press to start playback Playback will end when button is pressed again or entire memo has been playback played back Confirmation dialog will be displayed Press A or to Delete highlight option press t to select Sancel Delete Image sound voice ar Image sound Delete both o photo and voice memo 15 12 5008 10 7500 e Sound only Delete voice memo only To exit without deleting image or voice memo press the A button e Interrupting Playback Playback will end automatica
298. tch towards you The screen holder will spring open 3 Remove the existing screen Remove the existing screen using the supplied tweezers and being careful to handle the screen by the tab to avoid scratches 4 insert the replacement screen Using the tweezers and handling the screen by the tab set the replacement screen in the holder 396 5 Latch the screen holder Push the front edge of holder upward until it clicks into place v Replacing Focusing Screens Do not touch the surface of the mirror or focusing screens Framing Grids The display in type E focusing screens may be slightly out of position depending on how the focusing screen is placed 397 398 Replacing the Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about four years If the icon is displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on the battery is running low and needs to be replaced When the battery is exhausted the icon will blink while the exposure meters are on Photographs can still be taken but will not be stamped with the correct time and date and interval timer photography will not function correctly Replace the battery as described below T Remove the main battery The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main battery chamber Turn the camera off and remove the EN EL4a battery 2 Open the clock
299. te is supplied with the VI focusing camera screen Type E focusing screens are etched with a grid Type E making them suitable clear matte for copying and Viewfinder VI focusing architectural eyepiece screen photography Best accessories results are achieved with PC Nikkor lenses e Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder Use for close up photography copying telephoto lenses and other tasks that call for added precision DK 18 eyepiece adapter available separately required e Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK 14 DK 17A These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions The DK 17A is equipped with a safety lock e Rubber Eyepiece Cup DK 19 The DK 19 makes the image in the viewfinder easier to see preventing eye fatigue 388 e Diopter adjustment viewfinder lenses To accommodate individual differences in vision viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of 3 2 0 1 and 2 m values with camera diopter control centered at 1 m Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 3 to 1 m Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved The DK 17C is equipped with a safety lock Magnifying Eyepiece DK 17M The DK 17M magnifies the view Viewfinder through the viewfinder by approximately 1 2 x for greater eyepiece precision w
300. te balance and Interval timer shooting note that Interval timer shooting can only be adjusted before the first exposure is taken The Lock mirror up for cleaning and Dust off ref photo options in the setup menu can not be used 209 HE Interrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting Multiple exposure in the E Multiple exposure shooting menu while a multiple exposureis being recorded displays the options shown at right To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken highlight Cancel and press If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e A two button reset is performed pg 204 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted 210 Interval Timer Photography The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals 1 Select Interval timer SHOOTING MENU 10 Active D Lighting shooting 5 Vignette control y Long exp NR m High ISO NR Highlight Interval timer 2 E 150 santit satinas shooting in the shooting menu pg 290 and press gt intera tiner shots Ei 2 Selecta starting trigger E Interval timer shootins e Choose start
301. ted automatically during image review In single frame self timer and mirror up release modes photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken In continuous release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted holding the HI button and pressing A in full frame or thumbnail Choose slot playback will display the menu shown at right Slot Highlight the desired slot and press The same Slot 2 method can be used to choose a slot when selecting images for operations in the playback cancel pg 278 or retouch menus pg 363 or when choosing an image as the source for preset white balance pg 156 See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 319 The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed so that the A and buttons display other images and the lt and gt buttons control photo information See Custom Setting f3 Photo info playback pg 332 for details Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback There are up to 9 pages of information for each photo Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that shooting data RGB histograms and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Disp
302. ted using a computer or other device after the print order is created 273 274 Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG D2 audio video A V cable can be used to connect the D3X to a television or VCR for playback or recording A type A High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices Standard Definition Devices To connect the camera to a standard television 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A V cable 2 Connect the supplied A V cable as shown Connect to camera Connect to video device 3 Tune the television to the video channel 4 Turn the camera on and press gt button During playback images will be displayed both on the television screen and in the camera monitor Video Mode pg 348 Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device Note that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device Television Playback Use of an EH 6 AC adapter available separately is recommended for extended playback When the EH 6 is connected the camera monitor off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed
303. ter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Skylight Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the Warm filter copy a warm red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Color Balance Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms pg 232 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Press to copy the photograph GENDCancel Save Increase amount of green Increase Km amount of Or amount of blue wy amber Increase amount of magenta Increase Creating JPEG Copies of NEF RAW Pictures To create a JPEG copy of an NEF RAW picture select the NEF RAW picture for Color balance and press without modifying color balance The JPEG copy will have an image quality of fine and a size of L 370 Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals with results that are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings bef
304. th optional Speedlight See Also For information on choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 326 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed pg 327 197 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture FV lock is available with CLS compatible flash units only To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button fs 4 Asian FUNC button FUNC button press Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4 E aau Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button rn T me AE lock Reset on release press pg 333 MS AE lock Hold E ti AF lock only Attach a CLS compatible flash unit Mount an SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 or SU 800 on the camera accessory shoe 198 Set the flash unit to TTL or AA mode Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL or AA See the Speedlight instruction manual for details 4 Focus Position the subject in the _ center of the frame and press Ai the shutter release button t halfway to focus 5 Lock flash level After confirming that the fla
305. th and E Focal length mm Ea F qe Maximum aperture F28 aperture will be stored under the chosen lens number This i Move Bet combination of focal length and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens number using camera controls as described below BE Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number as the command dials option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu Non CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 333 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button pg 339 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 340 2 Use the selected control to choose a lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the top control panel Focal length Maximum aperture SS z8 Main command dial Lens number 220 Using a GPS Unit A GPS unit can be connected to the ten pin remote terminal allowing the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading to be recorded with each photograph taken The camera can be used with an optional GP 1 GPS unit see below note that the GP 1 does not provide the compass heading or with third party units connected via
306. that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding Save To Use Description y Press Q button TETE Zoomin Q and rotate main A command dial right to zoom in left to zoom out While Zoom out ES photo is zoomed in press ER and use View other multi selector to view areas of image not areasof Q visible in monitor Keep multi selector image pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame While R button is pressed area Cancel currently visible in monitor is indicated by zoom yellow border Press to cancel zoom If the camera detects red eye in the Create selected photograph a copy will be created cony T that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye 367 368 Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table 3 2 SAspect M4864x3240 25Scroll ORSave Cancel To Use Description Press S button and rotate main Reduce size z St ak tat rere E SS command dial right to reduce the size of P AF the crop y Press S button and rotate main Increase size i r ofro Eg a Command dial left to increase the size of p Re the crop y Rotate the main command
307. ting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting menu pg 290 interval timer settings will be reset as follows e Choose start time Now e Interval 00 01 00 e Number of intervals 1 e Number of shots 1 Start shooting Off 217 218 Non CPU Lenses By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using anon CPU lens If the focal length of the lens is known e Automatic power zoom can be used with SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 Speedlights available separately e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display When the maximum aperture of the lens is known e The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens e Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses including Reflex Nikkor lenses e Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens Zoom Lenses Lens dat
308. tion is performed when the Fn button is default pressed This option can not be used in combination with FUNC button dials pg 336 Selecting this options displays a message and sets FUNC button dials to None If another option is selected for FUNC button dials while this setting is active FUNC button press will be set to None Note that none of these options can be combined with FUNC 334 button dials gt Dynamic AF area see page 336 Virtual Horizon When Virtual horizon is selected for FUNC button press the electronic analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and top control panel act as a horizontal level when the Fn button is pressed Camera level Camera tilted left Control panel Viewfinder Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back 335 336 HE FUNC Button Dials Selecting FUNC button dials for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options Option Description Choose The Fn button and main command dial can be used Ba imagearea to select the image area from FX DX and 5 4 pg FX DX 5 4 60 The image area can not be changed while default shooting a multiple exposure pg 206 The Fn button and main command dial can be used E Choose to switch between FX and DX image areas The W imagearea 3 3 FX DX image area can not be chan
309. ton To return to Step 2 with the highlighted image selected press or the center of the multi selector m Side by Side Comparison The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has since been deleted is currently protected pg 244 or hidden pg 281 or contains embedded image authentication information pg 356 375 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus for quick access up to 20 items If desired recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu pg 380 Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below For information on basic menu operations see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items mp MMW e Image quality NORM In My Menu highlight Add G NEGAM orin items and press gt A D Remove items Rank items EJ Choose tab 2 Select a menu Add items Highlight the name of the CE Playback menu menu containing the option 2 Custom setting menu Setup menu Retouch menu you wish to add and press gt ke 3 Select an item Add items O A Shooting menu bank 1 Highlight the desired menu Bie fe item and press foe v Image quality Image size Image area 376 4 Position the new item Press A or W to move the new item up o
310. ttached ae iee wO ATA E QUAL button Main command dial Rear control panel Choose an image NORM size pg 71 Ox QD an QUAL button Sub command dial Rear control panel EE SO Sensitivity Press the ISO button and rotate the main command dial Set ISO sensitivity pg 5 104 Ss 9 aa 2 Cal Ls LS ISO button Main command dial Rear control panel 17 18 BE Exposure Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to choose the exposure mode Choose the exposure mode pg 113 MODE button Use the command dials to adjust exposure Choose a combination of aperture and shutter speed exposure mode SHOOT Ma 1 P pg 115 fi custom Exposure mode F Main command dial command dial Top control panel PY AG FS AF S REM foo Gi 2 16 Top control panel Choose a shutter speed exposure mode Sor M pg 116 121 Seam A SoA Exposure mode Sori Main command dial g eso AF S REM am N mm O eval 3 Top control panel Choose an aperture exposure mode F or M pg 118 121 roor N i Exposure mode Aor Sub command dial Ma re AF S REM tao A ve Top control panel Set exposure compensation
311. tter release button halfway AF ON button for vertical shooting Predictive Focus Tracking In continuous servo AF the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway or either of the AF ON buttons is pressed This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection pg 305 For information on using release priority in single servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 306 For information on preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter release button is pressed halfway see Custom Setting a5 AF activation pg 309 75 76 AF Area Mode AF area mode determines how the AF area mode selector focus point is selected in autofocus mode pg 74 To select the AF area mode rotate the AF area mode selector The following options are available Mode Description a User selects focus point manually camera focuses on ___ subject in selected focus point only Use for relatively Single point n AF static compositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus point e In continuous servo AF pg 74 user selects focus point manua
312. tton while turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap 7 CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring pg 384 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number See the lens manual for details Lens An AF Nikkor 85 mm f 1 4D lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes Lens cap Image Area The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached Image area 38 Basic Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed Choose a language and set the time and date T Turn the camera on Power switch 2 Select Language Press MENU to display the camera menus then select Language in the setup menu For information on using menus see Using Camera Menus pg 28 SETUP MENU Format memory card LCD brightness 0 Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode AUTO E Image comment OFF 3 Selecta language De Deutsch Press A or W to highlight the g desired language and press ME Enolish Es Espa ol Fi Suomi Fr Francais It Italiano NI Nederlands PI Polski 39 40 4 Select World time Select World time and press gt o SETUP MENU e Format memory card wv LCD brightness 0 Lock mirror up f
313. ty ssssss sssssssssssssss1 104 ISO sensitivity high low gain EAT EA AAE ATAT 105 Number of exposures remaining ssssessecsssscseorresssssssssssssss 49 Length of voice memo 251 White balance fine tuning 146 White balance preset NUMDEL u eessesssesseessecssessseeseesseesee 158 Color temperature wae 147 PC mode indicator 259 6 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES cseescssecsseecseescneecenscesees 49 Color temperature indicati seguon 147 7 Memory card slot indicators 72 Image quality ou eeeeccseecceseeeees 67 8 White balance bracketing IN d CAtOT ssssssssssssrssssessssseessesresseees 135 9 Voice memo recording indicator shooting mode 249 10 Voice memo status Indicator coeeecesessessessesseeseee 251 252 11 Voice memo recording MOE innana 249 12 White balance ecssecseesssees 140 White balance fine tuning ICICATOR epenn 146 11 12 The Viewfinder Display a goooOOOgqad ooooOOOogooo ooooooo0ooo0o0 0000000 21000 O00 959000 Se 1 12 mm reference circle for center weighted metering 110 2 AF area brackets wuss 47 92 3 Focus points 78 311 Spot metering targets 110 4 Focus indicator 5 Metering essecssessesscscoreooeesssese 6 Autoexposure AE lock 125 7 Exposure MOE essences 112 8 Shutter speed lock icon 123 9 Shutter speed
314. uctions If the Speedlight supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D3X is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 1600 At values over 1600 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed 191 192 The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction in red eye reduction and slow sync with red eye reduction modes while the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination when the conditions for AF assist illumination are met When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 17 135 mm the SB 900 provides AF assist illumination active AF assist illumination for all focus points note however that autofocus is available only with the following focus points 989550888 0888500 888 5 f 17 19 mm 200 009000 20 105 mm 8890 900 5959 106 135mm 9009099 0000 505 999 200 D00 099 200 D When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24 105 mm the SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination to assist autofocus for the following focus points 24 34 mm 35 49mm o 50 105mm oooog 00000 o0000 Ooooo 00000 Oooog Ooo
315. ull frame playback playback zoom pg 243 or deletion pg 245 Page through images Press Q button and rotate sub command dial to scroll through images a page at a time Delete highlighted photo T See page 245 for more information Record play voice See page 248 for more information memo Change protect status O of highlighted photo See page 244 for more information View images on other memory card If two memory cards are inserted choose memory card from which pictures are played back pg 228 Return to shooting mode Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately Display menus See page 277 for more information See Also For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector see Custom Setting f1 Multi selector center button pg 331 242 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the E button and rotate the main command dial right to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Use Description Zoom in or out E Press R button to display frame showing area currently zoomed in While Q a button is pressed main command dial can be used to control size of frame rotate dial left to zoom out right to
316. ure Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation amp icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation pg 128 is preferred in most situations 317 c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L At the default setting of Off exposure only locks when the AE L AF L button is pressed If On is selected exposure will also lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway c2 Auto Meter off Delay This option controls how long the camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are performed Choose from 4 s 6s 8s 16 s 30 s 1 minute 5 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes or until the camera is turned off No limit The shutter speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and viewfinder turn off automatically when the exposure meters turn off Option Dls 4s 6s 6s default Dgs 8s Bilis 16s Dls 30s Dim 1min 5m 5min Diim 10 min Dm 30 min o No limit Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life 318 c3 Self Timer Delay This option controls the length of the shutter release delay in self timer mode Choose from 2s 5 10s and 20 s c4 Monitor off Delay This option controls how long the monitor remains on
317. ures more vivid Not available with Neutral Monochrome or custom Picture Controls Sharpening Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 0 no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening Contrast 5 043U0 24N DIq IV sjuawjsn pe jenuey Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced Brightness brightness Does not affect exposure s Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust S Saturation saturation automatically according to the type of scene 3 z or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower 3 A values reduce saturation and higher values increase it 55 Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make 3 5 H reds more purple blues more green and greens more s3 se yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple Filter Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome 35 effects photographs Choose from Off the default setting os 35 yellow orange red and green p
318. us indicator will appear in the viewfinder Viewfinder display Description J Subject in focus gt Focus point is between camera and subject lt Focus point is behind subject gt lt Camera unable to focus on subject in focus blinks point using autofocus While the shutter release button is pressed halfway focus will lock and the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer pg 88 will be shown in the viewfinder display For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus see Getting Good Results with Autofocus pg 82 55 56 2 Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot Smoothly press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the picture Access lamp While the photograph is being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the card slot cover will light Do not eject the memory card turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down TD gt 7 N a Focus Take photograph Viewing Photographs 1 Press the A button The most re
319. ve D Lighting Vignette control Long exp NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view Custom settings all banks All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings 358 Menu Option Video mode HDMI World time excepting date and time Language Image comment Auto image rotation Voice memo Setup Voice memo overwrite Voice memo button Audio output USB Image authentication Copyright information GPS Non CPU lens data All My Menu items All recent settings Choose tab My Menu Recent Settings Settings saved using the D3X can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only available when a memory card is inserted in slot 1 and that the Load settings option is only available if the card in slot 1 contains saved settings the memory card in slot 2 can not be used to save or load settings Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP3 The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed 359 360 GPS Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit pg 221 Virtual Horizon Display a virtual horizon based on 3 Virtual horizon information from the camera orientation sensor vV Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back See Also For information o
320. ve edit and press gt Load save 3 Select a Picture Control Manage Picture Control 10 Choose Picture Control Highlight an existing Picture i aL Nera 1 Control and press P or press Ki to proceed to step 5 to save a k copy of the highlighted Picture EO Grid A TUst Control without further modification 4 Edit the selected control E Vivid eo See page 167 for more Z hem information To abandon any Briohtness changes and start over from a default settings press the f EO Grid WOK DReset button Press when settings are complete 5 Select a destination gt Manage Picture Control Oy Save as ra Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt ECT Unused 171 172 6 Name the Picture Control wm o123456789 Keyboard f gt 70MBCDEFGHI area The text entry dialog shown P CULES at right will be displayed By Name area default new Picture cai O E Controls are named by adding a two digit number assigned automatically to the name of the existing Picture Control This name can be edited to create a new name as described below To move the cursor in the name area press the EE button and press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position p
321. when the subject is not in focus In these cases use manual focus pg 83 or use focus lock pg 80 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background Example subject is the same color as the background The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera Example subject is inside a cage The subject is dominated by regular geometric coop patterns Example blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example subject is half in the shade Background objects appear larger than the subject Example a building is in the frame behind the subject The subject contains many fine details Example a field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness 82 Manual Focus Manual focus is available for Focus mode lenses that do not support selector autofocus non AF Nikkor lenses P O or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results pg 82 To focus manually set the focus mode selector to M and adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the clear matt
322. will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll within the AF area brackets Focus Autofocus focus mode S or C Press the shutter release v button halfway or press an AF ON button The camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the mirror will click back into place while either button is pressed temporarily interrupting live view Live view is restored when the button is released Manual focus focus mode M pg 83 Focus using the lens focusing ring 6 Take the picture 4 Press the shutter release button the rest lt of the way down to reset focus and exposure and take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed No Picture After shooting play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the photograph has been recorded Note that the sound the mirror makes when the shutter release button is pressed halfway or an AF ON button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of the shutter and that pressing the shutter release button all the way down when the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF will end live view without a photograph being recorded m 93 p 94 Tripod Mode 3 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surf
323. xisting print order created with the Print set DPOF option in the playback menu pg 272 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print See page 271 for more information 3 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture full screen press MQ button Toselectthe Om button current picture for printing press the O n button and press A The picture will be marked Fina Kom RA with a G icon and the number ma of prints will be set to 1 Se Keeping the O n button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected 4 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options Start printing W Page size 3 5x5in Border Time stamp 269 5 Adjust printing options ri Setu Press A or W to highlight an SUES Page size option and press to select 2 35x5in Border 29 Time stamp 4 Option Description Page size Menu of page size options will be displayed pg 266 Press A or W to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Border M
324. xposure How can I reduce blur Exposure delay mode 325 EE Viewing Photographs Question Key phrase See page Can I view my photographs on the Camera playback 226 camera Can I view more information about Photo info 229 photos Why do parts of my photos blink Photo info highlights 231 282 vii viii Question Key phrase See page How do get rid of an unwanted photo Deleting individual 245 photos Can I delete several photos at once Delete 281 Can l zoom in on pictures to make sure Playback zoom 243 they re in focus Can protect photos from accidental Protect 244 deletion Can I hide selected photos Hide image 281 How do I tell if parts of my photos may be Display mode Sopa 282 overexposed highlights How do tell where the camera focused a modefocus 282 Can I view photos as they are taken Image review 287 Can I record a voice memo on photos Voice memo 251 Is there an automatic playback slide Slide show 288 show option HE Retouching Photographs Question Key phrase See page How do I bring out details in shadows D Lighting 366 Can I get rid of red eye Red eye correction 367 Can I crop photographs on the camera Trim 368 Can I create a monochrome copy of a Monochrome 369 photograph Can I create a copy with different colors Filter effects 370 Can I use camera to create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs Color palange a Can overl
325. y oy cannot be Image quality set to NEF RAW 70 e Unlock focus selector lock 78 e Auto area AF selected for focus 76 mode choose another mode __ e The camera is in playback mode 225 Can not select focus point wo i e The camera is in menu operation 277 Press shutter release button 50 halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters Camera is slow to record Turn long exposure noise reduction 300 photos off e Sound of mirror clicking down 93 when shutter release button was pressed halfway in hand held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter Enotes not tacordedin e Unless Release is chosen for 93 306 live view mode Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when focus mode S is selected in hand held mode 409 Problem Solution Page e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or 104 300 Randomly spaced bright turn high ISO noise reduction on pixels noise appear in Shutter speed is slower than 8 s 300 photos use long exposure noise reduction Photos are blotched or e Clean lens smeared e Clean low pass filter 400 e Adjust white balance to match 140 Colors are unnatural light SOUTE e Adjust Set Picture Control 162 settings Can not measure white or Subject is too dark or too bright 152 balance Image can not be selected as source for preset white Image was not created with D3X
326. y mode playback photo information display pg 229 Press A or W to highlight an Eee option then press gt to select the option for aiRunedwall O RGB histogram the photo information display A Y appears next to selected items to deselect highlight and press To return to the playback menu highlight Done and press Option Description Basic photo info Focus point Active focus point or in single servo AF focus point where focus first locked is shown in red in photo information display No focus point is displayed if camera was unable to focus using continuous servo autofocus or if continuous servo autofocus was used with auto area AF o etailed photo info Highlights Highlights for master RGB channel and for individual red green and blue channels are shown in photo information display Very bright areas blink on and off RGB Red green and blue histograms are displayed in photo histogram information display Shooting data pages including camera name Data metering exposure focal length white balance and image options appear in photo information display Copy Image s Copy photographs from the memory card in slot 1 to the memory card in slot 2 Option Description i Select image s Select photographs from memory card in slot 1 4 Selectdestination 2 folder slot 2 Select destination folder on memory card in
327. y wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth 405 Batteries Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be removed with a soft dry cloth before use Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries Turn the product off before replacing the battery The battery may become hot when used for extended periods Observe due caution when handling the battery Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat After removing the battery from the camera be sure to replace the terminal cover Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL4a EN EL4 battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice On cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
328. yback menu pg 287 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 228 Voice Memo The voice memo menu contains options for recording voice memos during shooting See Voice Memos Recording Voice Memos pg 248 351 352 Voice Memo Overwrite This option determines whether the voice memo for the last photograph recorded can be overwritten when the camera is in shooting mode See Voice Memos Recording Voice Memos pg 249 Voice Memo Button This option controls the operation of the button See Voice Memos Recording Voice Memos pg 249 Audio Output Choose output options for voice memo playback See Voice Memos Playing Voice Memos pg 254 USB Choose a USB option for connection to a computer or PictBridge printer Choose MTP PTP the default setting when connecting to a PictBridge printer or an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter or when using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately see page 391 See page 257 for information on selecting a USB option for use with Nikon Transfer supplied Dust off Ref Photo Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 available separately for more information see the software manual Dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A non DxX lens with a focal length of at least

1 Select

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents